WO2020243888A1 - Wireless communication apparatus and carrier switching method - Google Patents

Wireless communication apparatus and carrier switching method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020243888A1
WO2020243888A1 PCT/CN2019/089894 CN2019089894W WO2020243888A1 WO 2020243888 A1 WO2020243888 A1 WO 2020243888A1 CN 2019089894 W CN2019089894 W CN 2019089894W WO 2020243888 A1 WO2020243888 A1 WO 2020243888A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
time period
local oscillator
component carrier
switch unit
time
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/089894
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
林雁
沈秀勇
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2019/089894 priority Critical patent/WO2020243888A1/en
Priority to CN201980016997.0A priority patent/CN112400339A/en
Publication of WO2020243888A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020243888A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a wireless communication device and a carrier switching method.
  • component carrier switching That is, the terminal can switch from one component carrier to another component carrier when transmitting data to the base station.
  • component carrier switching is sometimes called carrier switching or carrier selection. For example, if the channel quality of the current carrier is poor, you can switch to another carrier with better channel quality through the carrier switching process; or, if the current carrier has fewer uplink time slots, you can switch to another carrier with better channel quality through the carrier switching process.
  • Carriers with multiple uplink time slots are used for HARQ-ACK (hybrid automatic repeat request acknowledgement) feedback for data transmission or downlink services.
  • HARQ-ACK hybrid automatic repeat request acknowledgement
  • Carrier switching can increase the throughput of uplink traffic channel data and reduce the HARQ-ACK feedback delay of downlink traffic channel data.
  • the terminal's uplink data transmission may be interrupted, which will undoubtedly have an adverse effect on system performance. It is not difficult to understand that the longer the interruption time of carrier switching, the greater the impact on uplink data throughput and downlink feedback delay. Therefore, in order to improve the throughput of uplink traffic channel data and reduce the HARQ-ACK feedback delay of downlink traffic channel data, there is a need for fast switching between uplink carriers.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a wireless communication device and a carrier switching method to reduce the interruption time of data services when performing carrier switching.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a wireless communication device, the wireless communication device includes: a plurality of transmission channels, a first transmission channel of the plurality of transmission channels is used to transmit on a first component carrier in a first time period Data, the second transmission channel of the multiple transmission channels is used to send data on the first component carrier in the first time period, and to send data on the second component carrier in the second time period; the first local oscillator is used for Selectively provide the first local oscillator signal for the first mixer in the first transmission channel and the second mixer in the second transmission channel in the first time period; the second local oscillator is used to selectively The second local oscillator signal is provided for the second mixer in the second time period.
  • the multiple transmitting channels, the first local oscillator and the second local oscillator may be integrated in the first integrated circuit chip, for example, integrated in the radio frequency chip.
  • the first local oscillator is selectively used as the first mixer and the second mixer in the first time period.
  • the mixer provides the first local oscillator signal, which can realize the mixing of the first mixer and the second mixer according to the first local oscillator signal, thereby realizing the transmission of the first component carrier; similarly, since the second component carrier is in The second local oscillator is sent through the second transmitting channel during the second time period, so the second local oscillator selectively provides the second local oscillator signal for the second mixer in the second time period, which can realize the second mixer according to the second local oscillator.
  • the vibration signal is mixed to realize the transmission of the second component carrier.
  • the first local oscillator can be selectively enabled to output the first local oscillator according to the requirements of the effective time of the first local oscillator signal during carrier switching. Or selectively enable the second local oscillator to output the second local oscillator signal according to the requirement of the effective time of the second local oscillator signal, thereby shortening the interruption time.
  • the first local oscillator outputs the first local oscillator signal; While providing the first local oscillator signal to the first mixer and the second mixer (that is, while transmitting the first component carrier), the second local oscillator can be selectively activated in advance, but the second local oscillator is not The output of the oscillator is provided to the second mixer; after the transmission of the first component carrier is completed, the second local oscillator can be selectively enabled (that is, the output of the second local oscillator is provided to the second mixer).
  • the second local oscillator only needs a short time to reach a stable state, and stably outputs the second local oscillator signal, thereby sending data on the second component carrier in the second time period. That is to say, the interval between the first time period and the second time period is short, so the service interruption time during carrier switching is short, thereby reducing the impact of carrier switching on uplink data throughput and downlink feedback delay.
  • the first local oscillator is coupled with the first mixer through the first switch unit, and is coupled with the second mixer through the second switch unit; the second local oscillator is coupled with the second mixer through the third switch unit.
  • the first switch unit, the second switch unit, and the third switch unit can be switched to selectively provide the first local oscillator signal for the first mixer and provide the first local oscillator for the second mixer. Oscillation signal and second local oscillation signal.
  • the wireless communication device may further include: a controller for controlling the third switch unit to change from a closed state to an open state at the end of the second time period when the first time period is later than the second time period Control the first switch unit and the second switch unit to change from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the first time period; and, when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, control the first switch The unit and the second switch unit change from the closed state to the open state at the end of the first time period, and control the third switch unit to change from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the second time period.
  • the controller can control the third switch unit to change from the closed state.
  • the transmission of the second component carrier is stopped; at the beginning of the first time period, the transmission of the first component carrier needs to be started, so at this time the controller can control the first switching unit and the second switching unit to change from the disconnected state.
  • the closed state the transmission of the first component carrier is started.
  • the first time period is earlier than the second time period, the first component carrier has been transmitted at the end of the first time period, so at this time the controller can control the first switch unit and the second switch unit in the first time period.
  • the end time of the time period changes from the closed state to the open state, and the transmission of the first component carrier is stopped; at the beginning of the second time period, it is necessary to start sending the second component carrier. Therefore, the controller can control the third switch unit by The disconnected state is changed to the closed state, and the transmission of the second component carrier is started.
  • the controller is also used for: in the case that the first time period is later than the second time period, before the end of the second time period arrives, send the first control to the first local oscillator Signal, the first control signal is used to instruct the first local oscillator to configure the first working parameter, and the first working parameter is applicable to the first component carrier; when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, the first time period Before the end time of, send a second control signal to the second local oscillator, the second control signal is used to instruct the second local oscillator to configure the second working parameter, and the second working parameter is applicable to the second component carrier.
  • the first local oscillator in the case of switching from the second component carrier to the first component carrier, the first local oscillator can be activated in advance during the transmission process of the second component carrier, that is, it is configured before the end of the second time period.
  • the first working parameter of the first local oscillator enables the first local oscillator to be started in advance; in the case of switching from the first component carrier to the second component carrier, the second local oscillator can be started in advance during the transmission of the first component carrier Vibrate, that is, configure the second working parameter of the second local oscillator before the end of the first time period starts, so that the second local oscillator can be started in advance.
  • the controller is also used to configure the first working parameter to take effect at the first time when the first time period is later than the second time period, and the time difference between the first time and the start time of the first time period is greater than or Equal to the stabilization time of the first local oscillator; when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, the second working parameter is configured to take effect at the second time, and the time difference between the second time and the start time of the second time period is greater than or Equal to the stabilization time of the second local oscillator.
  • the first local oscillator when the first time period is later than the second time period, the first local oscillator can stably output the first local oscillator signal at the beginning of the first time period.
  • the second local oscillator can stably output the second local oscillator signal at the beginning of the second time period.
  • the first component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on the new air interface uplink NR UL
  • the second component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by a single antenna on the Long Term Evolution uplink LTE UL.
  • the first component carrier is a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on LTE UL
  • the second component carrier is a carrier transmitted by single antenna on NR UL.
  • the first component carrier and the second component carrier can be used for non-independent deployment of NSA networking.
  • the first component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on NR UL
  • the second component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by single antenna on SUL.
  • the first component carrier and the second component carrier can be used for the NR node of the NSA networking; or, the first component carrier and the second component carrier can be used for the independent deployment of the SA networking.
  • the first component carrier is a carrier for dual-antenna transmission on NR UL
  • the second component carrier is a carrier for single antenna transmission on NR UL
  • the first component carrier is dual-antenna transmission on LTE UL
  • the second component carrier is a carrier transmitted by a single antenna on LTE UL.
  • the first component carrier and the second component carrier are used in a dual-connection DC networking that belongs to the same radio access technology RAT.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a wireless communication device.
  • the wireless communication device includes: a plurality of transmission channels, a first transmission channel of the plurality of transmission channels is used to send data on a first component carrier in a first time period, and to send data on a second component carrier in a second time period Data; the second transmission channel of the multiple transmission channels is used to send data on the first component carrier in the first time period, and to send data on the second component carrier in the second time period; the first local oscillator is used for Selectively provide the first local oscillator signal for the first mixer in the first transmission channel and the second mixer in the second transmission channel in the first time period; the second local oscillator is used to selectively The second local oscillator signal is provided for the first mixer and the second mixer in the second time period.
  • the first mixer, the second mixer, the first local oscillator circuit, and the second local oscillator circuit may be integrated in the first integrated circuit chip, for example, integrated in the radio frequency chip.
  • the first local oscillator is selectively used as the first mixer and the second mixer in the first time period.
  • the mixer provides the first local oscillator signal, which can realize the mixing of the first mixer and the second mixer according to the first local oscillator signal, thereby realizing the transmission of the first component carrier; similarly, since the second component carrier is in In the second time period, it is sent through the first transmitting channel and the second transmitting channel, so the second local oscillator selectively provides the second local oscillator signal for the first mixer and the second mixer in the second time period, The first mixer and the second mixer can be mixed according to the second local oscillator signal, so as to realize the transmission of the first component carrier.
  • the first local oscillator can be selectively enabled to output the first local oscillator according to the requirements of the effective time of the first local oscillator signal during carrier switching. Or selectively enable the second local oscillator to output the second local oscillator signal according to the requirement of the effective time of the second local oscillator signal, thereby shortening the interruption time.
  • the first local oscillator outputs the first local oscillator signal; While providing the first local oscillator signal to the first mixer and the second mixer (that is, while transmitting the first component carrier), the second local oscillator can be selectively activated in advance, but the second local oscillator is not The output of the oscillator is provided to the second mixer; after the transmission of the first component carrier is completed, the second local oscillator can be selectively enabled (that is, the output of the second local oscillator is provided to the second mixer).
  • the second local oscillator Since the second local oscillator has been activated in advance, it only takes a short time to reach a stable state, and stably output the second local oscillator signal, thereby sending data on the second component carrier in the second time period. Since the interval between the first time period and the second time period is short, the service interruption time during carrier switching is short, thereby reducing the influence of carrier switching on uplink data throughput and downlink feedback delay.
  • the first local oscillator is coupled with the first mixer through the first switch unit, and is coupled with the second mixer through the second switch unit; the second local oscillator is coupled with the second mixer through the third switch unit.
  • the mixer is coupled to the first mixer through the fourth switch unit; in the first time period, the first switch unit and the second switch unit are in the closed state, and the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit are in the open state State; In the second time period, the first switch unit and the second switch unit are in the off state, and the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit are in the closed state.
  • the first switch unit, the second switch unit, the third switch unit, and the fourth switch unit can be switched to selectively provide the first local oscillator signal and the second local oscillator signal to the first mixer. , And provide the first local oscillator signal and the second local oscillator signal for the second mixer.
  • the wireless communication device provided in the second aspect may further include a controller for controlling the third switch unit and the fourth switch when the first time period is later than the second time period
  • the unit changes from the closed state to the open state at the end of the second time period, and controls the first switching unit and the second switching unit to change from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the first time period;
  • control the first switching unit and the second switching unit to change from the closed state to the open state at the end of the first time period, and control the third and fourth switching units to The start moment of the second time period changes from the open state to the closed state.
  • the controller can control the third switch unit and the fourth switch at this time
  • the unit changes from the closed state to the open state, and stops sending the second component carrier; at the beginning of the first time period, it needs to start sending the first component carrier, so the controller can control the first switching unit and the second switching unit at this time From the open state to the closed state, the transmission of the first component carrier is started.
  • the first time period is earlier than the second time period
  • the first component carrier has been transmitted at the end of the first time period, so at this time the controller can control the first switch unit and the second switch unit in the first time period.
  • the end time of the time period changes from the closed state to the open state, and the transmission of the first component carrier is stopped; at the beginning of the second time period, it is necessary to start sending the second component carrier, so the controller can control the third switch unit and The fourth switch unit changes from the open state to the closed state, and starts the transmission of the second component carrier.
  • the above-mentioned controller may also be used to send a first control signal to the first local oscillator before the end of the second time period arrives when the first time period is later than the second time period.
  • the signal is used to instruct the first local oscillator to configure the first working parameter, and the first working parameter is applicable to the first component carrier; when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, before the end of the first time period arrives , Sending a second control signal to the second local oscillator, where the second control signal is used to instruct the second local oscillator to configure the second working parameter, and the second working parameter is applicable to the second component carrier.
  • the first local oscillator in the case of switching from the second component carrier to the first component carrier, the first local oscillator can be activated in advance during the transmission process of the second component carrier, that is, it is configured before the end of the second time period.
  • the first working parameter of the first local oscillator enables the first local oscillator to be started in advance.
  • the second local oscillator can be started in advance during the transmission of the first component carrier, that is, the second local oscillator is configured before the end of the first time period.
  • the second working parameter of the so that the second local oscillator can be started in advance.
  • controller is further configured to configure the first working parameter to take effect at the first time when the first time period is later than the second time period, and the time difference between the first time and the start time of the first time period is greater than Or equal to the stabilization time of the first local oscillator; when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, the second working parameter is configured to take effect at the second time, and the time difference between the second time and the start time of the second time period is greater than Or equal to the stabilization time of the second local oscillator.
  • the first local oscillator in the case of switching from the second component carrier to the first component carrier, the first local oscillator can stably output the first local oscillator signal at the beginning of the first time period.
  • the second local oscillator in the case of switching from the first component carrier to the second component carrier, the second local oscillator can stably output the second local oscillator signal at the beginning of the second time period.
  • the first component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on NR UL
  • the second component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on LTE UL.
  • the first component carrier and the second component carrier can be used for non-independent deployment of NSA networking.
  • the first component carrier is a carrier for dual-antenna transmission on NR UL
  • the second component carrier is a carrier for dual-antenna transmission on NR UL
  • the first component carrier is a dual-antenna transmission on LTE UL
  • the second component carrier is the carrier for dual-antenna transmission on LTE UL.
  • the first component carrier and the second component carrier are used for DC networking belonging to the same RAT.
  • the wireless communication device includes: a plurality of transmission channels, a first transmission channel of the plurality of transmission channels is used to transmit data on a first component carrier in a first time period, and a second transmission channel of the plurality of transmission channels Used to send data on the first component carrier in the first time period, and to send data on the second component carrier in the second time period; the first local oscillator is used to output the first local oscillator signal; the second local oscillator, Used to output the second local oscillator signal.
  • the method includes: enabling a first local oscillator to provide a first local oscillator signal for a first mixer in a first transmission channel and a second mixer in a second transmission channel within a first time period;
  • the second local oscillator provides the second local oscillator signal for the second mixer in the second time period.
  • the first local oscillator is coupled with the first mixer through the first switch unit, and is coupled with the second mixer through the second switch unit; the second local oscillator is coupled with the second mixer through the third switch unit.
  • Mixer coupling; then, the method provided by the third aspect specifically includes: in the first time period, controlling the first switching unit and the second switching unit to be in the closed state, and the third switching unit to be in the open state; in the second time In the segment, the first switch unit and the second switch unit are controlled to be in an off state, and the third switch unit is in a closed state.
  • the method further includes: when the first time period is later than the second time period, controlling the third switch unit to change from the closed state to the open state at the end of the second time period, Control the first switching unit and the second switching unit to change from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the first time period; and, when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, control the first switching unit and The second switch unit changes from the closed state to the open state at the end of the first time period, and controls the third switch unit to change from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the second time period.
  • the method further includes: when the first time period is later than the second time period, before the end of the second time period arrives, controlling the first local oscillator to configure the first working parameter, and the first working parameter is applicable to The first component carrier; in the case that the first time period is earlier than the second time period, before the end of the first time period arrives, the second local oscillator is controlled to configure the second working parameter, and the second working parameter is applicable to the second Component carrier.
  • the method further includes: when the first time period is later than the second time period, configuring the first working parameter to take effect at the first time, and the time difference between the first time and the start time of the first time period is greater than or equal to The stabilization time of the first local oscillator; when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, configure the second working parameter to take effect at the second time, and the time difference between the second time and the start time of the second time period is greater than or equal to Settling time of the second local oscillator.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a carrier switching method, which is applied to the wireless communication device provided in the second aspect.
  • the wireless communication device includes: a plurality of transmission channels, a first transmission channel of the plurality of transmission channels is used to transmit data on a first component carrier in a first time period, and to transmit data on a second member carrier in a second time period Data is sent on the carrier; the second transmission channel of the multiple transmission channels is used to send data on the first component carrier in the first time period, and to send data on the second component carrier in the second time period; the first local oscillator , Used to output the first local oscillator signal; the second local oscillator, used to output the second local oscillator signal.
  • the method includes: enabling a first local oscillator to provide a first local oscillator signal for a first mixer in a first transmission channel and a second mixer in a second transmission channel within a first time period;
  • the two local oscillators provide a second local oscillator signal for the first mixer and the second mixer in the second time period.
  • the first local oscillator is coupled with the first mixer through the first switch unit, and is coupled with the second mixer through the second switch unit; the second local oscillator is coupled with the second mixer through the third switch unit.
  • the mixer is coupled to the first mixer through the fourth switch unit.
  • the method provided by the fourth aspect specifically includes: controlling the first switch unit and the second switch unit to be in the closed state, and the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit to be in the open state during the first time period; In the segment, the first switch unit and the second switch unit are controlled to be in an off state, and the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit are in a closed state.
  • the method further includes: when the first time period is later than the second time period, controlling the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit to change from the closed state at the end of the second time period In the open state, control the first switch unit and the second switch unit to change from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the first time period; and, when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, control The first switch unit and the second switch unit change from the closed state to the open state at the end of the first time period, and control the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit to change from the open state to the open state at the beginning of the second time period Closed state.
  • the method further includes: when the first time period is later than the second time period, before the end of the second time period arrives, controlling the first local oscillator to configure the first working parameter, and the first working parameter is applicable to The first component carrier; in the case that the first time period is earlier than the second time period, before the end of the first time period arrives, the second local oscillator is controlled to configure the second working parameter, and the second working parameter is applicable to the second Component carrier.
  • the method further includes: when the first time period is later than the second time period, configuring the first working parameter to take effect at the first time, and the time difference between the first time and the start time of the first time period is greater than or equal to The stabilization time of the first local oscillator; when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, configure the second working parameter to take effect at the second time, and the time difference between the second time and the start time of the second time period is greater than or equal to Settling time of the second local oscillator.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless communication system provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a flow of carrier switching of a terminal according to an embodiment of the application
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of another terminal provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of a first wireless communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a second wireless communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of the interruption time on the air interface symbol during carrier switching according to an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a third wireless communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a fourth wireless communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a fifth wireless communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a sixth wireless communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic flowchart of a carrier switching method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic flowchart of another carrier switching method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • devices can be divided into devices that provide wireless network services and devices that use wireless network services.
  • Devices that provide wireless network services refer to those devices that make up a wireless communication network, which can be referred to as network equipment or network elements for short.
  • Network equipment usually belongs to operators or infrastructure providers, and these vendors are responsible for operation or maintenance.
  • Network equipment can be further divided into radio access network (RAN) equipment and core network (CN) equipment.
  • RAN radio access network
  • CN core network
  • a typical RAN device includes a base station (BS).
  • the base station may sometimes be referred to as a wireless access point (access point, AP) or a transmission reception point (transmission reception point, TRP).
  • the base station may be a general node B (generation Node B, gNB) in a 5G new radio (NR) system, or an evolution node B (evolutional Node B, eNB) in a 4G long term evolution (LTE) system.
  • the base station can be divided into a macro base station or a micro base station.
  • Micro base stations are sometimes called small base stations or small cells.
  • Terminals Devices that use wireless network services are usually located at the edge of the network and can be referred to as terminals for short.
  • the terminal can establish a connection with the network device, and provide users with specific wireless communication services based on the service of the network device. It should be understood that because the relationship between the terminal and the user is closer, it is sometimes called a user equipment (UE) or a subscriber unit (SU).
  • UE user equipment
  • SU subscriber unit
  • MS mobile stations
  • some network devices such as relay nodes (RN) or wireless routers, etc., may also be considered as terminals due to their UE identity or belonging to users.
  • the terminal can be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a laptop computer, a wearable device (such as smart watches, smart bracelets, smart helmets, smart glasses), and others Devices with wireless access capabilities, such as smart cars, various Internet of Things (IOT) devices, including various smart home devices (such as smart meters and smart home appliances) and smart city devices (such as security or surveillance equipment, Intelligent road traffic facilities) etc.
  • IOT Internet of Things
  • smart home devices such as smart meters and smart home appliances
  • smart city devices such as security or surveillance equipment, Intelligent road traffic facilities
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless communication system provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • the wireless communication system includes a terminal and a base station. According to different transmission directions, the transmission link from the terminal to the base station is recorded as uplink (UL), and the transmission link from the base station to the terminal is recorded as downlink (DL).
  • UL uplink
  • DL downlink
  • data transmission in the uplink can be referred to as uplink data transmission or uplink transmission
  • data transmission in the downlink can be referred to as downlink data transmission or downlink transmission.
  • the base station can provide communication coverage for a specific geographic area through an integrated or external antenna device.
  • One or more terminals located within the communication coverage area of the base station can access the base station.
  • the wireless communication system can comply with the wireless communication standards of the third generation partnership project (3GPP), or other wireless communication standards, such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) ) 802 series (such as 802.11, 802.15, or 802.20) wireless communication standards.
  • 3GPP Third Generation Partnership Project
  • IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
  • 802 series such as 802.11, 802.15, or 802.20 wireless communication standards.
  • the wireless communication system may also include other numbers of terminals and base stations.
  • the wireless communication system may also include other network equipment, such as core network equipment.
  • the terminal and base station should know the predefined configuration of the wireless communication system, including the radio access technology (RAT) supported by the system and the radio resource configuration specified by the system, such as the radio frequency band and the basic configuration of the CC.
  • the predefined configuration of these systems can be used as a part of the standard protocol of the wireless communication system, or determined by the interaction between the terminal and the base station.
  • the content of the relevant standard protocol may be pre-stored in the memory of the terminal and the base station, or embodied in the hardware circuit or software code of the terminal and the base station.
  • CC is a frequency range that complies with system regulations. This section of frequency range can be jointly determined by the center frequency of the CC (denoted as the carrier frequency) and the bandwidth of the CC.
  • the terminal can know the uplink carrier set for uplink data transmission, so as to transmit data on one or more carriers in the uplink carrier set; similarly, the base station can also know the downlink carrier for downlink data transmission Set, so that data is sent on one or more carriers in the downlink carrier set.
  • the terminal and the base station can support one RAT (for example, 5G NR, 4G LTE or the RAT of the future evolution system), and can also support multiple RATs.
  • the way that the terminal and base station support one RAT can be called standalone (standalone, SA); the way that the terminal and base station support multiple RATs can be called non-standalone (NSA), or dual connectivity (dual connectivity). connectivity, DC).
  • dual connectivity includes but is not limited to E-UTRA_NR dual connectivity (EN-DC), NR_E-UTRA dual connectivity (NR E-UTRA dual connectivity, NE-DC), NR_NR dual connectivity (NR_NR) dual connectivity, NR-NR DC), LTE-LTE dual connectivity (LTE-LTE dual connectivity, LTE-LTE DC) or other multi-RAT dual connectivity (MR-DC).
  • EN-DC E-UTRA_NR dual connectivity
  • NR E-UTRA dual connectivity NR E-UTRA dual connectivity
  • NE-DC NR_NR dual connectivity
  • NR_NR dual connectivity
  • NR-NR DC NR-NR DC
  • LTE-LTE dual connectivity LTE-LTE dual connectivity
  • LTE-LTE DC LTE-LTE DC
  • MR-DC multi-RAT dual connectivity
  • the uplink includes NR UL and SUL.
  • there are two uplink carriers in the NR cell one is the NR UL carrier and the other is the SUL carrier.
  • the terminal can transmit uplink data through multiple uplinks.
  • the terminal can transmit uplink data through NR UL and SUL; in NSA, the terminal can transmit through NR UL, LTE UL, SUL, etc.
  • the uplink carrier set configured by the system for the terminal may include CCs in multiple frequency bands, for example, including CCs in the NR UL frequency band, CCs in the LTE UL frequency band, and CCs in the SUL frequency band.
  • the terminal When the terminal is performing uplink data transmission, it can perform carrier switching in the CC of the uplink carrier set.
  • the terminal can perform carrier switching within the frequency band, for example, switching from NR UL CC1 to CC2, or cross-band carrier switching, such as switching from LTE UL CC1 to NR UL. CC2, the embodiment of this application is applicable to both switching modes.
  • the carrier switching process of the terminal may be as shown in Figure 2.
  • the base station may send carrier configuration information and a carrier switching request to the terminal, and the terminal performs the carrier switching operation based on the configuration and scheduling of the base station.
  • both component carriers may be transmitted with a single antenna (for example, CC1 is transmitted through antenna 1 and CC2 is transmitted through antenna 2), or one component carrier may be transmitted with a single antenna and the other component carrier Multi-antenna transmission (for example, sending CC1 through antenna 1, or sending CC2 through antenna 1 and antenna 2 at the same time), it is also possible that both component carriers are multi-antenna transmission (for example, sending CC1 through antenna 1 and antenna 2 at the same time, or sending CC1 through antenna 1 Send CC2 simultaneously with antenna 2).
  • the terminal adjusts the transmitting channel in different ways when performing carrier switching.
  • CC1 and CC2 are sent at different times. For example, the terminal performs uplink data transmission on CC1, and then switches to CC2 for uplink data transmission based on the instructions of the base station. Or, the terminal performs uplink data transmission on CC2, and then switches to CC1 for uplink data transmission based on the instruction of the base station.
  • Scenario 1 Both CC1 and CC2 are transmitted by a single antenna.
  • CC1 can use a single antenna to transmit uplink data on NR UL (for example, 3.5G frequency band), and CC2 can use a single antenna to transmit uplink data on SUL (for example, 1.8G frequency band).
  • the terminal can perform carrier switching between CC1 and CC2.
  • CC1 can be used in NR UL (for example, 3.5 G band) uses a single antenna to transmit uplink data
  • CC2 can use a single antenna to transmit uplink data on LTE UL (for example, 1.8G band)
  • the terminal can perform carrier switching between CC1 and CC2
  • CC1 can be in NR UL (
  • a single antenna is used to transmit uplink data on the 3.5G frequency band
  • CC2 can use a single antenna to transmit uplink data on the SUL (for example, the 1.8G frequency band)
  • the terminal can perform carrier switching between CC1 and CC2.
  • the base station allows the terminal to allow single UL operation (SUO), or to avoid simultaneous transmission of LTE UL and NR UL With the introduction of intermodulation interference, the base station allows the terminal SUO. At this time, the terminal cannot send LTE UL and NR UL at the same time. Then, CC1 can use a single antenna to transmit uplink data on LTE UL, or CC2 can use a single antenna to transmit uplink data on NR UL, and the terminal can perform carrier switching between CC1 and CC2.
  • the semi-static power sharing state means that in the NSA scenario, the sum of the linear power configured by the terminal under LTE and the linear power under NR is greater than the maximum linear power configured under the NSA for the terminal, and the base station can Instruct the terminal SUO, that is, the terminal can only send LTE UL or NR UL alone, and cannot send LTE UL and NR UL at the same time, so as to prevent the terminal's power from exceeding the maximum linear power configured under the NSA.
  • the intermodulation product refers to that in the NSA scenario, the intermodulation interference of NR UL and LTE UL sent by the terminal happens to fall on LTE or NR DL, thereby causing intermodulation interference to the reception of LTE or NR DL.
  • the base station can instruct the terminal SUO to avoid interference to the receiving sensitivity of LTE or NR DL.
  • Scenario 2 CC1 single antenna transmission, CC2 multiple antenna transmission.
  • the base station allows the terminal SUO.
  • CC1 can use a single antenna to transmit uplink data on LTE UL
  • CC2 can use multiple antennas to transmit uplink data on NR UL
  • the terminal can perform Carrier switching between CC1 and CC2.
  • CC1 when SA mode is used and SUL is available, in the cell center, CC1 can use a single antenna to send uplink data on SUL, CC2 can use multiple antennas to send uplink data on NR UL, and the terminal can perform between CC1 and CC2.
  • For carrier switching use additional SUL carriers to increase uplink spectrum resources and improve uplink data throughput; or, at the cell edge, CC1 can use a single antenna to transmit uplink data on SUL, and CC2 can use multiple antennas to transmit on NR UL.
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • the terminal can perform carrier switching between CC1 and CC2, and use the SUL carrier to overcome the coverage defect of NR UL at the cell edge.
  • the base station allows the terminal SUO, CC1 can use a single antenna to transmit uplink data on LTE UL, and CC2 can use multiple antennas to transmit uplink data on NR UL. At this time, SUL does not transmit uplink data.
  • the terminal can perform carrier switching between CC1 and CC2.
  • Scenario 3 Both CC1 and CC2 are multi-antenna transmission.
  • the base station allows the terminal SUO.
  • CC1 can use multiple antennas to transmit uplink data on LTE UL
  • CC2 can use multiple antennas to transmit uplink data on NR UL
  • the terminal can perform Carrier switching between CC1 and CC2.
  • the base station allows the terminal SUO, CC1 can use multiple antennas to transmit uplink data on LTE UL, and CC2 can use multiple antennas to transmit uplink data on NR UL. At this time, SUL does not transmit uplink data.
  • the terminal can perform carrier switching between CC1 and CC2.
  • the terminal adjusts the transmission channel when performing carrier switching in the above three scenarios.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • the terminal can include application subsystems, memory, mass storage, baseband subsystems, radio frequency intergreted circuit (RFIC), and radio frequency front end.
  • RFIC radio frequency intergreted circuit
  • RFFE radio frequency front end
  • antennas antennas
  • ANT_1 represents the first antenna
  • ANT_N represents the Nth antenna
  • N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • Tx represents the transmission path
  • Rx represents the reception path
  • different numbers represent different paths.
  • FBRx represents the feedback receiving path
  • PRx represents the main receiving path
  • DRx represents the diversity receiving path.
  • HB stands for high frequency
  • LB stands for low frequency. Both refer to the relative high and low of the frequency.
  • BB stands for baseband. It should be understood that the marks and components in FIG. 3 are for illustrative purposes only, and are only used as a possible implementation manner, and the embodiments of the present application also include other implementation manners.
  • the application subsystem can be used as the main control system or main computing system of the terminal to run the main operating system and application programs, manage the software and hardware resources of the entire terminal, and provide users with a user operation interface.
  • the RFFE device and RFIC 1 can jointly form a radio frequency subsystem.
  • the radio frequency subsystem can be further divided into radio frequency receiving channel (RF receive path) and radio frequency transmitting channel (RF transmit path).
  • the radio frequency receiving channel can receive the radio frequency signal through the antenna, and process the radio frequency signal (such as amplifying, filtering and down-converting) to obtain the baseband signal, and pass it to the baseband subsystem.
  • the radio frequency transmitting channel can receive the baseband signal from the baseband subsystem, perform radio frequency processing (such as up-conversion, amplification and filtering) on the baseband signal to obtain the radio frequency signal, and finally radiate the radio frequency signal into the space through the antenna.
  • the radio frequency subsystem may include an antenna switch, an antenna tuner, a low noise amplifier (LNA), a power amplifier (PA), a mixer (mixer), and a local oscillator (LO). ), filters and other electronic devices, which can be integrated into one or more chips as needed.
  • the antenna can sometimes be considered part of the radio frequency subsystem.
  • the baseband subsystem can extract useful information or data bits from the baseband signal, or convert the information or data bits into a baseband signal to be sent. These information or data bits can be data representing user data or control information such as voice, text, and video.
  • the radio frequency signal is an analog signal
  • the signal processed by the baseband subsystem is mainly a digital signal
  • an analog-to-digital conversion device is also required in the terminal.
  • the analog-to-digital conversion device includes an analog-to-digital converter (ADC) that converts an analog signal into a digital signal, and a digital-to-analog converter (DAC) that converts a digital signal into an analog signal.
  • ADC analog-to-digital converter
  • DAC digital-to-analog converter
  • the analog-to-digital conversion device may be arranged in the baseband subsystem or the radio frequency subsystem.
  • Memory can be divided into volatile memory (volatile memory) and non-volatile memory (non-volatile memory, NVM).
  • Volatile memory refers to the memory in which the data stored inside will be lost when the power supply is interrupted.
  • volatile memory is mainly random access memory (RAM), including static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM) and dynamic random access memory (dynamic RAM, DRAM).
  • RAM random access memory
  • SRAM static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • Non-volatile memory refers to the memory in which the data stored inside will not be lost even if the power supply is interrupted.
  • Common non-volatile memories include read only memory (ROM), optical discs, magnetic disks, and various memories based on flash memory (flash memory) technology.
  • volatile memory can be selected for memory
  • non-volatile memory such as magnetic disk or flash memory, can be selected for mass storage.
  • the baseband subsystem and the radio frequency subsystem jointly constitute a communication subsystem, which provides wireless communication functions for the terminal.
  • the baseband subsystem is responsible for managing the software and hardware resources of the communication subsystem, and can configure the working parameters of the radio frequency subsystem.
  • One or more processing cores of the baseband subsystem may be integrated into one or more chips, which may be referred to as a baseband processing chip or a baseband chip.
  • RFIC can be called a radio frequency processing chip or a radio frequency chip.
  • the functional division of the radio frequency subsystem and the baseband subsystem in the communication subsystem can also be adjusted. For example, integrating some of the functions of the radio frequency subsystem into the baseband subsystem, or integrating some of the functions of the baseband subsystem into the radio frequency subsystem.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of another terminal provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • Figure 4 shows some common devices used for radio frequency signal processing in a terminal. It should be understood that although only two radio frequency receiving channels and two radio frequency transmitting channels are shown in FIG. 4, the terminal in the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
  • the RF signal received from the antenna is selected by the antenna switch and sent to the RF receiving channel. Since the radio frequency signal received from the antenna is usually very weak, it is usually amplified by LNA. The amplified signal first undergoes the down-conversion processing of the mixer, and then the filter and ADC, and finally completes the radio frequency signal processing.
  • the baseband signal can be converted into an analog signal through a DAC. The analog signal is converted into a radio frequency signal through the up-conversion processing of the mixer. The radio frequency signal is processed by a filter and a PA, and finally selected by an antenna switch , Radiate outward from a suitable antenna.
  • the input signal and the local oscillator signal output by the local oscillator are mixed to achieve up-conversion (corresponding to the radio frequency transmitting channel) or down-conversion (corresponding to the radio frequency receiving channel) operation.
  • the local oscillator is a common term in the radio frequency field, usually referred to as local oscillator.
  • the local oscillator is sometimes called a frequency synthesizer or frequency synthesizer, or frequency synthesizer for short.
  • the main function of the local oscillator or frequency synthesizer is to provide the specific frequency required for radio frequency processing, such as the frequency of the carrier. Higher frequencies can be implemented by using devices such as phase locked loop (PLL) or delay locked loop (DLL).
  • PLL phase locked loop
  • DLL delay locked loop
  • the lower frequency can be achieved by directly using a crystal oscillator, or by dividing the high frequency signal generated by a device such as a PLL.
  • both CC1 and CC2 can adopt single antenna transmission or multi-antenna transmission.
  • CC1 can be transmitted on radio frequency transmission channel 1 shown in Figure 4, and CC2 can be transmitted on radio frequency transmission channel 2 shown in Figure 4;
  • CC1 can be transmitted on radio frequency transmission channel 2 shown in Figure 4 Send on RF transmission channel 1
  • CC2 can be sent on RF transmission channel 1 and RF transmission channel 2 shown in Figure 4;
  • scenario 3 CC1 can be sent on RF transmission channel 1 and RF transmission channel 2 shown in Figure 4 Send, CC2 can be sent on the radio frequency transmitting channel 1 and the radio frequency transmitting channel 2 shown in FIG. 4.
  • RF transmission channel 2 is used to send both CC1 and CC2. Therefore, when switching the carrier between CC1 and CC2, the parameters of RF transmission channel 2 need to be adjusted; in scenario 3 In the RF transmission channel 1 and the RF transmission channel 2 are used to send both CC1 and CC2. Therefore, when the carrier switching between CC1 and CC2 is performed, the parameters of the RF transmission channel 1 and the RF transmission channel 2 need to be adjusted.
  • the local oscillator needs a certain time (for example, 130 us to 140 us) to reach a stable working state and output a stable local oscillator signal. Therefore, when performing carrier switching, especially when performing carrier switching in the aforementioned scenario 2 and scenario 3, because there is multiplexing of radio frequency channels between the carriers, and because it takes time to wait for the local oscillator to stabilize, a longer carrier is introduced.
  • the data service is interrupted, which affects the uplink data throughput and the HARQ-ACK feedback delay of the downlink data, and it is difficult to meet the service requirements of fast handover.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a wireless communication device and a carrier switching method to reduce the interruption time of data services when performing carrier switching.
  • the wireless communication device 500 includes multiple transmission channels, the first transmission channel 501 of the multiple transmission channels is used to transmit data on the first component carrier in the first time period, and the second transmission channel 502 of the multiple transmission channels It is also used to send data on the first component carrier in the first time period.
  • the second transmission channel 502 is also used to send data on the second component carrier in the second time period.
  • the wireless communication device 500 also includes a first local oscillator 503 and a second local oscillator 504.
  • the first local oscillator 503 is used to selectively provide a first local oscillator signal for the first mixer in the first transmission channel 501 and the second mixer in the second transmission channel 502 in the first time period.
  • the second local oscillator 504 is used to selectively provide a second local oscillator signal for the second mixer in the second time period.
  • the multiple transmission channels, the first local oscillator 503 and the second local oscillator 504 may be integrated in a first integrated circuit chip, for example, may be integrated in an RFIC.
  • the first component carrier is transmitted using multiple antennas (dual antennas), and the second component carrier is transmitted using a single antenna. That is, in the first time period, the first component carrier is transmitted on the first transmission channel 501 and the second transmission channel 502; in the second time period, the second component carrier is transmitted on the second transmission channel 502.
  • the wireless communication device 500 shown in FIG. 5 is suitable for carrier switching in the second scenario described above.
  • the second transmission channel 502 is time-division multiplexed.
  • the first time period may be later than the second time period or may be earlier than the second time period.
  • each transmission channel corresponds to an antenna unit. If a component carrier is transmitted through two transmission channels in the same time period, it means that the component carrier is transmitted by dual antennas in this time period. If a component carrier is transmitted through a transmission channel in a time period, it means that the component carrier is transmitted by a single antenna in this time period.
  • the transmission channel in the wireless communication device 500 can be regarded as the radio frequency transmission channel in the terminal shown in FIG. 4, which is used to transmit the radio frequency signal through the antenna unit after performing radio frequency processing on the baseband signal; the transmission channel in the wireless communication device 500 It can also be regarded as a collection of the baseband signal processing part and the radio frequency transmission channel in the terminal shown in Figure 4, which is used to convert information or data bits into baseband signals to be sent, and perform radio frequency processing on the baseband signals and pass the radio frequency signals through the antenna. The unit is sent out.
  • the devices included in the emission channel in the embodiment of this application are not limited to the solution shown in FIG. limited.
  • the wireless communication device 500 includes multiple (at least two) transmission channels, that is, in addition to the first transmission channel 501 and the second transmission channel 502, the wireless communication device 500 may also include other transmission channels.
  • the use of other transmission channels is not limited.
  • the wireless communication device 500 may further include a third transmission channel, which is used to transmit data on the first component carrier in the first time period.
  • the first local oscillator 503 can also selectively provide the first local oscillator signal for the third mixer in the third transmitting channel in the first time period.
  • the focus of this application is Data transmission on the first transmission channel 501 and the second transmission channel 502.
  • the local oscillator is regarded as a component independent of the transmitting channel. The purpose of this is to reflect that the first local oscillator 503 and the second local oscillator 504 provide the first local oscillator signal and the second local oscillator in a time-sharing manner.
  • Two local oscillator signal Since the second transmission channel 502 requires both the first local oscillator 503 to provide the first local oscillator signal and the second local oscillator 504 to provide the second local oscillator signal, the first local oscillator 503 and the second local oscillator 503 are not limited in the embodiment of this application.
  • the second local oscillator 504 belongs to a certain transmitting channel.
  • the first local oscillator 503 and the second local oscillator 504 can also be regarded as components of the transmitting channel.
  • the first local oscillator 503 can be regarded as a component of the first emission channel 501
  • the second local oscillator 504 can be regarded as a component of the second emission channel 502.
  • the first local oscillator 503 is selectively the first mixed carrier in the first time period.
  • the frequency converter and the second mixer provide the first local oscillator signal, which can realize the mixing of the first mixer and the second mixer according to the first local oscillator signal, thereby realizing the transmission of the first component carrier; similarly, because The second component carrier is sent through the second transmit channel 502 in the second time period, so the second local oscillator 504 selectively provides the second local oscillator signal for the second mixer in the second time period, which can realize the second The mixer performs mixing according to the second local oscillator signal, thereby realizing the transmission of the second component carrier.
  • the output of the first local oscillator 503 can be selectively enabled according to the requirements of the effective time of the first local oscillator signal during carrier switching.
  • the first local oscillator signal or the second local oscillator 504 is selectively enabled to output the second local oscillator signal according to the requirements of the effective time of the second local oscillator signal, thereby shortening the interruption time.
  • the first local oscillator 503 outputs the first local oscillator signal; While the local oscillator 503 provides the first local oscillator signal for the first mixer and the second mixer (that is, while transmitting the first component carrier), the second local oscillator 504 can be selectively activated in advance, but the The output of the second local oscillator 504 is provided to the second mixer; after the transmission of the first component carrier is completed, the second local oscillator 504 can be selectively enabled (that is, the output of the second local oscillator 504 is provided to the second mixer).
  • the second local oscillator 504 can reach a stable state in a short time, and output the second local oscillator signal stably, so as to send data on the second component carrier in the second time period. That is to say, the interval between the first time period and the second time period is short, so the service interruption time during carrier switching is short, thereby reducing the impact of carrier switching on uplink data throughput and downlink feedback delay.
  • the first local oscillator 503 and the second local oscillator 504 selectively provide the first local oscillator signal and the second local oscillator signal can be achieved in the following manner: the first local oscillator 503 is mixed with the first through the first switch unit The second local oscillator 504 is coupled to the second mixer through the second switch unit; the second local oscillator 504 is coupled to the second mixer through the third switch unit. In the first time period, the first switch unit and the second switch unit are in the closed state, and the third switch unit is in the off state; in the second time period, the first switch unit and the second switch unit are in the off state, The third switch unit is in a closed state.
  • the wireless communication device 500 may be as shown in FIG. 6.
  • the first switch unit, the second switch unit, and the third switch unit can be switched to selectively provide the first local oscillator signal for the first mixer and provide the first local oscillator for the second mixer. Oscillation signal and second local oscillation signal.
  • the first transmission channel 501 and the second transmission channel 502 send data on the first component carrier.
  • the first switch unit and the second switch unit can be closed, and the third switch unit can be disconnected. Therefore, the first local oscillator 503 is coupled with the first mixer and the second mixer, and the first local oscillator signal output by the first local oscillator 503 can be provided to the first mixer and the second mixer; at the same time, Since the third switch unit is turned off, the second local oscillator signal is not provided to the second mixer, and the second local oscillator signal will not affect the transmission of the first component carrier on the second transmission channel 502.
  • the second transmission channel 502 transmits data on the second component carrier.
  • the first switch unit and the second switch unit can be disconnected, and the third switch unit can be closed, so the second local oscillator 504 Coupled with the second mixer, the second local oscillator signal output by the second local oscillator 504 can be provided to the second mixer; at the same time, since the first switch unit and the second switch unit are disconnected, the first local oscillator signal It is not provided to the second mixer, and the first local oscillator signal will not affect the transmission of the second component carrier on the second transmission channel 502.
  • the wireless communication device 500 may further include a controller, which may control the on-off of the first switch unit, the second switch unit, and the third switch unit according to service requirements.
  • the control logic of the controller is related to the time sequence of the first time period and the second time period. The following describes the control when the first time period is later than the second time period and the first time period is earlier than the second time period. Specific operations performed by the device.
  • the first time period is later than the second time period.
  • the controller when the first time period is later than the second time period, the controller is used to control the third switch unit to change from the closed state to the open state at the end of the second time period, and control the first switch unit and The second switch unit changes from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the first time period.
  • the first time period is later than the second time period, that is, data is first sent on the second transmission channel 502 through the second component carrier, and then data is sent on the first transmission channel 501 and the second transmission channel 502 through the first component carrier, That is, switching from the second component carrier to the first component carrier.
  • the controller can control the third switch unit to change from the closed state to the open state, and stop the transmission of the second component carrier;
  • the controller can control the first switching unit and the second switching unit to change from the open state to the closed state, and start sending the first component carrier.
  • the controller may also send a first control signal to the first local oscillator 503 before the end of the second time period arrives.
  • the first control signal is used to instruct the first local oscillator 503 to configure the first working parameter.
  • the working parameters are applicable to the first component carrier.
  • the first working parameter may be used to configure the frequency of the local oscillator signal output by the first local oscillator 503. Because in the time period before the arrival of the first time period, the first local oscillator 503 may be used to provide a local oscillator signal with a frequency different from that of the first local oscillator signal. Therefore, before switching to the first component carrier, the first local oscillator 503 The operating parameters of the vibration 503 are configured.
  • the first local oscillator 503 in the case of switching from the second component carrier to the first component carrier, since the first operating parameter is configured to the first local oscillator 503, the first local oscillator 503 It takes a certain time (130us ⁇ 140us) to output the first local oscillator signal stably. Therefore, in this application, the first local oscillator 503 can be activated in advance during the transmission of the second component carrier, that is, at the end of the second time period Before starting, configure the first working parameters of the first local oscillator 503 so that the first local oscillator 503 can be started in advance.
  • the first local oscillator 503 has been configured with the first working parameters, and the first local oscillator 503 does not need to wait for 130us to 140us to reach stability, thereby shortening the second time period and the first time period Interruption time between.
  • the interruption time between the second time period and the first time period may be 0 us to tens of us.
  • the effective time of the first working parameter can be configured as follows: the first working parameter is configured to take effect at the first moment, and the time difference between the first moment and the start moment of the first time period is greater than or equal to the stabilization time of the first local oscillator. With this configuration, the first local oscillator 503 can stably output the first local oscillator signal at the beginning of the first time period.
  • the first local oscillator 503 can remain normally on (that is, always output the first local oscillator signal), or according to the uplink-downlink ratio format configured by the base station , When the first local oscillator 503 is required to output the first local oscillator signal, it is turned on at least 130us to 140us in advance.
  • the controller in the wireless communication device 500 can also configure the parameters of other devices in the first transmission channel 501 and the second transmission channel 502 before the arrival of the first time period, for example, by sending a control signal to the parameters of these devices.
  • the transmission digital front end (TXDFE), radio frequency analog front end (RFAFE), RFFE, and components in the antenna switch in the first transmission channel 501 and the second transmission channel 502 can be To configure the parameters.
  • the first time period is earlier than the second time period.
  • the controller when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, the controller is used to control the first switching unit and the second switching unit to change from the closed state to the open state at the end of the first time period, and control The third switch unit changes from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the second time period.
  • the first time period is earlier than the second time period, that is, data is sent on the first transmission channel 501 and the second transmission channel 502 through the first component carrier, and then data is sent on the second transmission channel 502 through the second component carrier. That is, switching from the first component carrier to the second component carrier.
  • the first component carrier has been transmitted at the end of the first time period, so at this time the controller can control the first switching unit and the second switching unit to change from the closed state at the end of the first time period. In the disconnected state, the transmission of the first component carrier is stopped; at the beginning of the second time period, the transmission of the second component carrier needs to be started, so at this time the controller can control the third switch unit from the open state to the closed state, and start Transmission of the second component carrier.
  • the controller may also send a second control signal to the second local oscillator 504 before the end of the first time period arrives.
  • the second control signal is used to instruct the second local oscillator 504 to configure the second operating parameters,
  • the working parameters are applicable to the second component carrier.
  • the second operating parameter may be used to configure the frequency of the local oscillator signal output by the second local oscillator 504. Since the second local oscillator 504 may be used to provide a local oscillator signal with a different frequency from the second local oscillator signal in the time period before the arrival of the second time period, the second local oscillator signal needs to be adjusted before switching to the second component carrier.
  • the operating parameters of the vibration 504 are configured.
  • the second local oscillator 504 in the case of switching from the first component carrier to the second component carrier, since the second operating parameter is configured to the second local oscillator 504, the second local oscillator 504 It takes a certain time (130us ⁇ 140us) to output the second local oscillator signal stably. Therefore, in this application, the second local oscillator 504 can be activated in advance during the transmission of the first component carrier, that is, at the end of the first time period Before starting, configure the second working parameters of the second local oscillator 504 so that the second local oscillator 504 can be started in advance.
  • the second local oscillator 504 has been configured with the second operating parameters, and the second local oscillator 504 does not need to wait for 130us to 140us to reach stability, thereby shortening the first time period and the second time period Interruption time between.
  • the interruption time between the first time period and the second time period may be 0 us to tens of us.
  • the effective time of the second working parameter can be configured as follows: the second working parameter is configured to take effect at the second time, and the time difference between the second time and the start time of the second time period is greater than or equal to the stabilization time of the second local oscillator.
  • the second local oscillator 504 can stably output the second local oscillator signal at the beginning of the second time period.
  • the second local oscillator 504 can remain normally on (that is, always output the second local oscillator signal), or it can be based on the uplink and downlink ratio format configured by the base station.
  • the second local oscillator 504 is required to output the second local oscillator signal, it is turned on at least 130 us to 140 us in advance.
  • the controller in the wireless communication device 500 can also configure the parameters of other devices in the second transmission channel 502 before the second time period arrives, for example, by sending a control signal to configure the parameters of these devices, and set The time for the configuration to take effect is several us or tens of us before the start of the second time period (that is, the stabilization time of other devices), and after the time of several us or tens of us, other devices reach a stable state.
  • the parameters of the devices in the TXDFE, RFAFE, RFFE, and antenna switch in the second transmission channel 502 can be configured.
  • the wireless communication device 500 when the wireless communication device 500 provided by the embodiment of the present application is used to perform carrier switching, the interruption time (0 us ⁇ tens of us) is less than the stable time of the local oscillator (130 us ⁇ 140 us), so wireless The communication device 500 can implement fast switching between carriers.
  • CC1 2T indicates that the first component carrier is transmitted on two antennas
  • CC21T indicates that the second component carrier is transmitted on one antenna.
  • the controller in the embodiment of the present application may be a controller (such as a baseband processor) in the baseband subsystem in the terminal shown in FIG. 3.
  • the baseband subsystem determines that the terminal needs to switch from the first component carrier to the second component carrier after receiving the carrier configuration information and the carrier switching request sent by the base station.
  • the device sends control signals to related devices in the RFIC (such as local oscillators and switching units), configures the on-off and working parameters of the related devices, and configures the related devices according to the instructions of the baseband processor to achieve rapid carrier switching.
  • the above-mentioned controller can also be understood as the controller in the RFIC in the terminal shown in FIG. 3 (for example, the digital signal processor in the RFIC).
  • the baseband subsystem determines that the terminal needs to switch from the first component carrier to the second component carrier after receiving the carrier configuration information and the carrier switching request sent by the base station.
  • the device sends control commands to the digital signal processor in the RFIC.
  • the digital signal processor in the RFIC adapts it to the control command of the relevant RF device based on the control command, and sends control signals to the relevant device to configure the on-off and working parameters of the relevant device .
  • fast carrier switching can be realized.
  • first local oscillator 503 and the second local oscillator 504 selectively provide the first local oscillator signal and the second local oscillator signal can also be achieved in the following manner: the third local oscillator is coupled to the first mixer through a switch unit , The fourth local oscillator and the fifth local oscillator are coupled with the second mixer through a single-pole multi-throw switch. Among them, the third local oscillator and the fourth local oscillator output the first local oscillator signal, and the fifth local oscillator outputs the second local oscillator signal.
  • the switch unit In the first time period, the switch unit is closed, and the third local oscillator provides the first local oscillator signal to the first mixer; in addition, the single-pole double-throw switch gates the fourth local oscillator, and the fourth local oscillator moves to the second mixer.
  • the frequency converter provides the first local oscillator signal.
  • the switch unit In the second time period, the switch unit is turned off, and the third local oscillator no longer provides the first local oscillator signal to the first mixer; in addition, the single-pole double-throw switch gates the fifth local oscillator, and the fifth local oscillator direction
  • the second mixer provides a second local oscillator signal.
  • the above-mentioned single-pole multi-throw switch is only an implementation way to realize the selective gating of the local oscillator signal, and the above-mentioned single-pole double-throw switch can also be replaced with other devices for gating the local oscillator signal, such as a multiplexer MUX, etc. .
  • the wireless communication device 500 With the wireless communication device 500 provided in the present application, it is possible to quickly switch between the first component carrier and the second component carrier.
  • the first component carrier multi-antenna (dual antenna) transmission and the second component carrier single antenna transmission.
  • the first component carrier and the second component carrier may be component carriers in different networking modes. Several specific examples of the first component carrier and the second component carrier are given below.
  • the first component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on NR UL
  • the second component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by single antenna on LTE UL.
  • the base station allows the terminal SUO
  • the first component carrier can be transmitted by dual antennas on NR UL
  • the second component carrier can be transmitted by single antenna on LTE UL.
  • the wireless communication device 500 may be used to perform fast switching between the first component carrier and the second component carrier.
  • the base station allows the terminal SUO. At this time, the terminal does not send SUL.
  • the first component carrier can be transmitted by dual antennas on NR UL, and the second component carrier can be transmitted on LTE A single antenna is used for transmission on the UL.
  • the wireless communication device 500 may be used to perform fast switching between the first component carrier and the second component carrier.
  • the first component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on NR UL
  • the second component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by single antenna on SUL.
  • the first component carrier can be transmitted by dual antennas on NR UL
  • the second component carrier can be transmitted by single antenna on SUL.
  • the wireless communication device 500 may be used to perform fast switching between the first component carrier and the second component carrier.
  • the first component carrier and the second component carrier are used for the part of the NR node composed of NSA, and the first component carrier can be transmitted on NR UL using dual antennas.
  • the second component carrier can be transmitted on the SUL by using a single antenna.
  • the wireless communication device 500 can be used to quickly switch between the first component carrier and the second component carrier.
  • the first component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on NR UL
  • the second component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by single antenna on NR UL
  • the first component carrier may be a carrier transmitted on dual antennas on LTE UL
  • the second component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by a single antenna on LTE UL.
  • the first component carrier and the second component carrier are used for DC networking belonging to the same RAT.
  • the wireless communication device 500 shown in FIG. 5 is also applicable to the aforementioned scenario 1.
  • the second switch unit can be kept disconnected all the time, the first component carrier is transmitted with a single antenna on the first transmission channel, and the second component carrier is transmitted with a single antenna on the second transmission channel.
  • the first component carrier and the second component carrier can realize 0us seamless switching.
  • FIG. 8 shows a schematic structural diagram of a wireless communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the wireless communication device can be regarded as a specific example of the wireless communication device 500.
  • the baseband processor After the baseband processor performs signal processing, the baseband signal is sent to the serializer/deserializer (Serdes) and then divided into two transmission channels. Each transmitting channel contains TXDFE, system clock, DAC, filter, mixer, PA, and then the radio frequency signal is selected by an antenna switch module (ASM) and then sent out through an antenna unit (ANT).
  • ASM antenna switch module
  • ANT antenna unit
  • the wireless communication device also includes two phase-locked loops (PLL0 and PLL1) to provide local oscillator signals for the mixer.
  • PLL0 and PLL1 phase-locked loops
  • CC1 1T can be configured on the TX1 channel; CC2 1T can be configured on the TX0 channel, and the other 1T can be configured on the TX1 channel. That is, CC1 implements single antenna transmission through TX1, and CC2 implements dual antenna transmission through TX0 and TX1.
  • TX0 and TX1 still send the remaining data of CC2; after the PLL1 130us ⁇ 140us is stable, the remaining data of CC2 is sent, open switches K0 and K1, at this time, you can close PLL0, close switch K2, and adjust TX1 to the transmit power of CC1.
  • TX1 sends the uplink service data of CC1, and TX0 maintains a low-power operation state.
  • PLL0 When switching from CC1 to CC2, PLL0 can be started early. After CC1 sends the data of TX1, open switch K2, and PLL1 can be closed at this time; in addition, close switches K0 and K1, TX0 and TX1 are adjusted to the transmission power of CC2, and TX0 and TX1 send the uplink traffic channel data of CC2.
  • the wireless communication device shown in FIG. 8 may also support CC1 single antenna transmission and CC2 single antenna transmission.
  • switch K1 is open, switches K0 and K2 are closed, CC1 is sent through TX1, and CC2 is sent through TX0. Since the two channels of CC1 and CC2 do not affect each other, CC1 and CC2 can achieve 0us seamless switching.
  • TX0 and TX1 can be kept in a normally open state, that is, working parameters such as sampling rate, frequency, and calibration parameters have been configured.
  • PLL0 and PLL1 can be normally open, and TX0 and TX1 can be gated only by the closed and open state of the switch; the start and stop of PLL0 and PLL1 and the state of the switch can also be controlled according to the uplink and downlink ratio format , Realize the low-power processing that is off-the-shelf.
  • the first local oscillator 503 is selectively In the first time period, the first local oscillator signal is provided for the first mixer and the second mixer, and the first mixer and the second mixer can be mixed according to the first local oscillator signal, thereby realizing the first Component carrier transmission; similarly, since the second component carrier is transmitted through the second transmission channel 502 in the second time period, the second local oscillator 504 selectively provides the second mixer for the second mixer in the second time period. Two local oscillator signals can realize that the second mixer performs mixing according to the second local oscillator signal, thereby realizing the transmission of the second component carrier.
  • the output of the first local oscillator 503 can be selectively enabled according to the requirements of the effective time of the first local oscillator signal during carrier switching.
  • the first local oscillator signal or the second local oscillator 504 is selectively enabled to output the second local oscillator signal according to the requirements of the effective time of the second local oscillator signal, thereby shortening the interruption time.
  • the first local oscillator 503 outputs the first local oscillator signal; While the local oscillator 503 provides the first local oscillator signal for the first mixer and the second mixer (that is, while transmitting the first component carrier), the second local oscillator 504 can be selectively activated in advance, but the The output of the second local oscillator 504 is provided to the second mixer; after the transmission of the first component carrier is completed, the second local oscillator 504 can be selectively enabled (that is, the output of the second local oscillator 504 is provided to the second mixer).
  • the second local oscillator 504 can reach a stable state in a short time, and output a stable second local oscillator signal, so as to send data on the second component carrier in the second time period. That is to say, the interval between the first time period and the second time period is short, so the service interruption time during carrier switching is short, thereby reducing the impact of carrier switching on uplink data throughput and downlink feedback delay.
  • the wireless communication device 900 includes multiple transmission channels.
  • the first transmission channel 901 of the multiple transmission channels is used to transmit data on a first component carrier in a first time period, and is also used to transmit data to a second member carrier in a second time period. Data is sent on the carrier; the second transmission channel 902 of the multiple transmission channels is used to send data on the first component carrier in the first time period, and is also used to send data on the second component carrier in the second time period.
  • the first local oscillator 903 is used to selectively provide the first local oscillator signal for the first mixer in the first transmission channel 901 and the second mixer in the second transmission channel 902 in the first time period.
  • the second local oscillator 904 is used to selectively provide a second local oscillator signal for the first mixer and the second mixer in the second time period.
  • the multiple transmitting channels, the first local oscillator 903 and the second local oscillator 904 may be integrated in the first integrated circuit chip, for example, may be integrated in the RFIC.
  • the first component carrier is transmitted using multiple antennas (dual antennas), and the second component carrier is transmitted using multiple antennas (dual antennas). That is, in the first time period, the first component carrier is transmitted on the first transmission channel 901 and the second transmission channel 902; in the second time period, the second component carrier is transmitted on the first transmission channel 901 and the second transmission channel 902 send.
  • the wireless communication device 900 shown in FIG. 9 is suitable for carrier switching in the third scenario described above.
  • both the first transmission channel 901 and the second transmission channel 902 are time division multiplexed.
  • the first time period may be later than the second time period or may be earlier than the second time period.
  • the first local oscillator 903 and the second local oscillator 904 selectively provide the first local oscillator signal and the second local oscillator signal in the following manner: the first local oscillator 903 is mixed with the first local oscillator through the first switch unit
  • the second local oscillator 904 is coupled to the second mixer through the third switch unit, and is coupled to the first mixer through the fourth switch unit; in the first During the time period, the first switch unit and the second switch unit are in the closed state, and the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit are in the open state; in the second time period, the first switch unit and the second switch unit are in the open state State, the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit are in a closed state.
  • the wireless communication device 900 may be as shown in FIG. 10.
  • the first switch unit, the second switch unit, the third switch unit, and the fourth switch unit can be switched to selectively provide the first local oscillator signal and the second local oscillator signal to the first mixer. , And provide the first local oscillator signal and the second local oscillator signal for the second mixer.
  • the first transmission channel 901 and the second transmission channel 902 transmit data on the first component carrier.
  • the first switch unit and the second switch unit can be closed, and the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit can be closed.
  • the switch unit is disconnected, so the first local oscillator 903 is coupled with the first mixer and the second mixer.
  • the first local oscillator signal output by the first local oscillator 903 can be provided to the first mixer and the second mixer.
  • the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit are disconnected, the second local oscillator signal is not provided to the first mixer and the second mixer, and the second local oscillator signal will not affect the first
  • the transmission of the first component carrier on the transmission channel 901 and the second transmission channel 902 has an impact.
  • the first transmission channel 901 and the second transmission channel 902 send data on the second component carrier.
  • the first switch unit and the second switch unit can be disconnected, and the third switch unit and the second switch unit can be disconnected.
  • the four-switch unit is closed, so the second local oscillator 904 is coupled with the first mixer and the second mixer, and the second local oscillator signal output by the second local oscillator 904 can be provided to the first mixer and the second mixer.
  • the first switch unit and the second switch unit are disconnected, the first local oscillator signal is not provided to the first mixer and the second mixer, and the first local oscillator signal will not be transmitted to the first
  • the transmission of the second component carrier on the channel 901 and the second transmission channel 902 has an impact.
  • the wireless communication device 900 may further include a controller, which can control the on-off of the first switch unit, the second switch unit, the third switch unit, and the fourth switch unit according to service requirements.
  • the control logic of the controller is related to the time sequence of the first time period and the second time period. The following describes the control when the first time period is later than the second time period and the first time period is earlier than the second time period. Specific operations performed by the device.
  • the first time period is later than the second time period.
  • the controller when the first time period is later than the second time period, the controller is used to control the third switching unit and the fourth switching unit to change from the closed state to the open state at the end of the second time period, and control The first switch unit and the second switch unit change from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the first time period.
  • the first time period is later than the second time period, that is, switching from the second component carrier to the first component carrier.
  • the second component carrier has been transmitted, so at this time the controller can control the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit from the closed state to the open state, and stop the second component carrier.
  • Component carrier transmission the first component carrier needs to be sent at the beginning of the first time period, so at this time the controller can control the first switching unit and the second switching unit from the open state to the closed state to start the first member Carrier transmission.
  • the controller may also send a first control signal to the first local oscillator 903 before the end of the second time period arrives.
  • the first control signal is used to instruct the first local oscillator 903 to configure the first working parameter,
  • the working parameters are applicable to the first component carrier.
  • the first working parameter may be used to configure the frequency of the local oscillator signal output by the first local oscillator 903. Because in the time period before the arrival of the first time period, the first local oscillator 903 may be used to provide a local oscillator signal with a frequency different from that of the first local oscillator signal. Therefore, before switching to the first component carrier, the first local oscillator 903 The working parameters of the vibration 903 are configured.
  • the first local oscillator 903 in the case of switching from the second component carrier to the first component carrier, since the first operating parameter is configured to the first local oscillator 903, the first local oscillator 903 It takes a certain time (130us ⁇ 140us) to output the first local oscillator signal stably. Therefore, in this application, the first local oscillator 903 can be activated in advance during the transmission of the second component carrier, that is, at the end of the second time period Before starting, configure the first working parameters of the first local oscillator 903 so that the first local oscillator 903 can be started in advance.
  • the first local oscillator 903 has been configured with the first working parameters, and the first local oscillator 903 does not need to wait for 130us to 140us to reach stability, thereby shortening the second time period and the first time period Interruption time between.
  • the interruption time between the second time period and the first time period may be 0 us to tens of us.
  • the effective time of the first working parameter can be configured as follows: the first working parameter is configured to take effect at the first moment, and the time difference between the first moment and the start moment of the first time period is greater than or equal to the stabilization time of the first local oscillator. With this configuration, the first local oscillator 903 can stably output the first local oscillator signal at the beginning of the first time period.
  • the controller in the wireless communication device 900 can also configure the parameters of other devices in the first transmission channel 901 and the second transmission channel 902 before the arrival of the first time period, for example, by sending a control signal to the parameters of these devices.
  • the parameters of the devices in the TXDFE, RFAFE, RFFE, and antenna switches in the first transmission channel 901 and the second transmission channel 902 can be configured.
  • the first time period is earlier than the second time period.
  • the controller when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, the controller is used to control the first switching unit and the second switching unit to change from the closed state to the open state at the end of the first time period, and control The third switch unit and the fourth switch unit change from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the second time period.
  • the first time period is earlier than the second time period, that is, switching from the first component carrier to the second component carrier.
  • the first component carrier has been transmitted at the end of the first time period, so at this time the controller can control the first switching unit and the second switching unit to change from the closed state at the end of the first time period.
  • the transmission of the first component carrier is stopped; at the beginning of the second time period, the second component carrier needs to be transmitted, so at this time the controller can control the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit to change from the disconnected state.
  • the closed state the transmission of the second component carrier is started.
  • the controller may also send a second control signal to the second local oscillator 904 before the end of the first time period arrives.
  • the second control signal is used to instruct the second local oscillator 904 to configure the second working parameters.
  • the working parameters are applicable to the second component carrier.
  • the second operating parameter may be used to configure the frequency of the local oscillator signal output by the second local oscillator 904. Since the second local oscillator 904 may be used to provide a local oscillator signal with a frequency different from that of the second local oscillator signal in the time period before the arrival of the second time period, the second local oscillator signal needs to be checked before switching to the second component carrier.
  • the operating parameters of the vibration 904 are configured.
  • the second local oscillator 904 in the case of switching from the first component carrier to the second component carrier, since the second operating parameter is configured to the second local oscillator 904, the second local oscillator 904 It takes a certain time (130us ⁇ 140us) to output the second local oscillator signal stably. Therefore, in this application, the second local oscillator 904 can be activated in advance during the transmission of the first component carrier, that is, at the end of the first time period Before starting, configure the second working parameters of the second local oscillator 904 so that the second local oscillator 904 can be started in advance.
  • the second local oscillator 904 has been configured with the second working parameters, and the second local oscillator 904 does not need to wait for 130us to 140us to reach stability, thereby shortening the first time period and the second time period Interruption time between.
  • the interruption time between the first time period and the second time period may be 0 us to tens of us.
  • the effective time of the second working parameter can be configured as follows: the second working parameter is configured to take effect at the second time, and the time difference between the second time and the start time of the second time period is greater than or equal to the stabilization time of the second local oscillator.
  • the second local oscillator 904 can stably output the second local oscillator signal at the beginning of the second time period.
  • the controller in the wireless communication device 900 can also configure the parameters of other devices in the second transmission channel 902 before the second time period arrives, for example, by sending control signals to configure the parameters of these devices, and set The time for the configuration to take effect is several us or tens of us before the start of the second time period (that is, the stabilization time of other devices), and after the time of several us or tens of us, other devices reach a stable state.
  • the parameters of the devices in the TXDFE, RFAFE, RFFE, and antenna switch in the second transmission channel 902 can be configured.
  • the first local oscillator 903 and the second local oscillator 904 can be kept in a normally on state, or they can be output according to the uplink and downlink ratio format configured by the base station.
  • the vibration signal is turned on at least 130us to 140us in advance, it will not be repeated here.
  • the controller in the wireless communication device 900 reference may be made to the relevant description in the wireless communication device 500, which will not be repeated here.
  • the selective provision of the first local oscillator signal and the second local oscillator signal by the first local oscillator 903 and the second local oscillator 904 can also be achieved in the following manner: the third local oscillator and the fourth local oscillator pass the single-pole multi-throw switch 1 Coupled with the first mixer, the fifth local oscillator and the sixth local oscillator are coupled with the second mixer through the single-pole multi-throw switch 2. Among them, the third local oscillator and the fifth local oscillator output the first local oscillator signal, and the fourth local oscillator and the sixth local oscillator output the second local oscillator signal.
  • SPDT switch 1 In the first time period, SPDT switch 1 gated the third local oscillator, SPDT switch 2 gated the fifth local oscillator, and the third local oscillator and the fifth local oscillator were sent to the first mixer and the second local oscillator respectively.
  • the mixer provides the first local oscillator signal.
  • SPDT switch 1 In the second time period, SPDT switch 1 gates the fourth local oscillator, SPDT switch 2 gates the sixth local oscillator, and the fourth local oscillator and the sixth local oscillator are directed to the first mixer and the second The mixer provides the second local oscillator signal.
  • the above-mentioned single-pole multi-throw switch is only an implementation way to realize the selective gating of the local oscillator signal, and the above-mentioned single-pole double-throw switch can also be replaced with other devices for gating the local oscillator signal, such as a multiplexer MUX, etc. .
  • the wireless communication device 900 it is possible to quickly switch between the first component carrier and the second component carrier.
  • the first component carrier multi-antenna (dual antenna) transmission and the second component carrier multi-antenna (dual antenna) transmission.
  • the first component carrier and the second component carrier may be component carriers in different networking modes.
  • the first component carrier and the second component carrier are given below.
  • the first component carrier can be transmitted with dual antennas on NR UL
  • the second component carrier can be transmitted with dual antennas on NR UL.
  • the wireless communication device 900 can be used for the first component carrier and Fast handover between second component carriers.
  • the first component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on NR UL
  • the second component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on LTE UL.
  • the base station allows the terminal SUO
  • the first component carrier can be transmitted with dual antennas on NR UL
  • the second component carrier can be transmitted with dual antennas on LTE UL.
  • the wireless communication device 900 may be used to perform fast switching between the first component carrier and the second component carrier.
  • the base station allows the terminal SUO. At this time, the terminal does not send SUL.
  • the first component carrier can be transmitted on NR UL using dual antennas
  • the second component carrier can be transmitted on LTE Dual-antenna transmission is used on the UL.
  • the wireless communication device 900 can be used to quickly switch between the first component carrier and the second component carrier.
  • the first component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on NR UL
  • the second component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on NR UL
  • the first component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on LTE UL
  • the second component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on LTE UL.
  • the first component carrier and the second component carrier are used for DC networking belonging to the same RAT.
  • the wireless communication device 900 shown in FIG. 9 is also applicable to the foregoing scenario 1.
  • the second switch unit and the fourth switch unit can be kept disconnected all the time, the first component carrier is transmitted with a single antenna on the first transmission channel, and the second component carrier is transmitted with a single antenna on the second transmission channel. In this case, 0us seamless switching can be realized for the first component carrier and the second component carrier.
  • FIG. 11 shows a schematic structural diagram of a wireless communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the wireless communication device can be regarded as a specific example of the wireless communication device 900.
  • the baseband signal is sent to the serializer/deserializer (Serdes) and then divided into two transmission channels.
  • Each transmitting channel contains TXDFE, system clock, DAC, filter, mixer, PA, and then the radio frequency signal is selected by ASM and sent out through ANT.
  • the wireless communication device also includes two phase-locked loops (PLL0 and PLL1) to provide local oscillator signals for the mixer.
  • PLL0 is connected to TX0 and TX1 and is gated through switches K0 and K1
  • PLL1 is connected to TX0 and TX1 and is gated through switches K2 and K3.
  • CC2 is configured in PLL0
  • CC1 is configured in PLL1.
  • the 1T of CC1 can be configured on the TX0 channel, and the other 1T can be configured on the TX1 channel; the 1T of CC2 can be configured on the TX0 channel, and the other 1T can be configured on the TX1 channel. That is, CC1 realizes dual-antenna transmission through TX1 and TX2, and CC2 realizes dual-antenna transmission through TX0 and TX1.
  • TX0 and TX1 still send the remaining data of CC2; after PLL1 130us ⁇ 140us is stable, the remaining data of CC2 is sent, open switches K0 and K1, at this time, you can close PLL0, close switches K2 and K3, and adjust TX0 and TX1 to The transmit power of CC1, TX0 and TX1 transmit the uplink service data of CC1.
  • PLL0 When switching from CC1 to CC2, PLL0 can be started early. After CC1 sends the data of TX0 and TX1, open switches K2 and K3, and PLL1 can be closed at this time; at the same time, close switches K0 and K1, adjust TX0 and TX1 to the transmission power of CC2, TX0 and TX1 send CC2's uplink business Channel data.
  • the wireless communication device shown in FIG. 11 may also support CC1 single antenna transmission and CC2 single antenna transmission.
  • switches K1 and K3 are open, switches K0 and K2 are closed, CC1 is sent through TX1, and CC2 is sent through TX0. Since the two channels of CC1 and CC2 do not affect each other, CC1 and CC2 can achieve 0us seamless switching.
  • the first local oscillator 903 is selectively used in the first time period.
  • the first mixer and the second mixer provide the first local oscillator signal, and the first mixer and the second mixer can be mixed according to the first local oscillator signal, so as to realize the transmission of the first component carrier;
  • the second local oscillator 904 is selectively used as the first mixer and the second transmitter in the second time period.
  • the second mixer provides the second local oscillator signal, so that the first mixer and the second mixer can mix according to the second local oscillator signal, thereby realizing the transmission of the first component carrier.
  • the output of the first local oscillator 903 can be selectively enabled according to the requirements of the effective time of the first local oscillator signal during carrier switching.
  • the first local oscillator signal or the second local oscillator 904 is selectively enabled to output the second local oscillator signal according to the requirements of the effective time of the second local oscillator signal, thereby shortening the interruption time.
  • the first local oscillator 903 outputs the first local oscillator signal; While the local oscillator 903 provides the first local oscillator signal for the first mixer and the second mixer (that is, while transmitting the first component carrier), the second local oscillator 904 can be selectively activated in advance, but the The output of the second local oscillator 904 is provided to the second mixer; after the transmission of the first component carrier is completed, the second local oscillator 904 can be selectively enabled (that is, the output of the second local oscillator 904 is provided to the second mixer). Frequency converter).
  • the second local oscillator 904 since the second local oscillator 904 has been activated in advance, it only takes a short time to reach a stable state, and output the second local oscillator signal stably, so as to be on the second component carrier in the second time period. send data. Since the interval between the first time period and the second time period is short, the service interruption time during carrier switching is short, thereby reducing the influence of carrier switching on uplink data throughput and downlink feedback delay.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a carrier switching method.
  • the carrier switching method is applied to a wireless communication device, and the wireless communication device includes: a plurality of transmission channels, the first transmission channel of the plurality of transmission channels is used to transmit data on the first component carrier in the first time period, and The second transmission channel of the two transmission channels is used to send data on the first component carrier in the first time period and to send data on the second component carrier in the second time period; the first local oscillator is used to output the first component carrier. Local oscillator signal; the second local oscillator, used to output the second local oscillator signal.
  • the carrier switching method includes the following steps.
  • S1201 Enable the first local oscillator to provide the first local oscillator signal for the first mixer in the first transmission channel and the second mixer in the second transmission channel in the first time period.
  • S1202 Enable the second local oscillator to provide the second local oscillator signal for the second mixer in the second time period.
  • the first local oscillator can be coupled with the first mixer through the first switch unit, and coupled with the second mixer through the second switch unit; the second local oscillator can be coupled with the second mixer through the third switch unit.
  • the method shown in FIG. 12 specifically includes: in the first time period, controlling the first switching unit and the second switching unit to be in the closed state, and the third switching unit to be in the off state; in the second time period, controlling The first switch unit and the second switch unit are in an open state, and the third switch unit is in a closed state.
  • the method shown in FIG. 12 further includes: when the first time period is later than the second time period, controlling the third switch unit to change from the closed state to the open state at the end of the second time period, and controlling the second time period A switch unit and a second switch unit change from an open state to a closed state at the beginning of the first time period; and, when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, control the first switch unit and the second switch unit The switching unit changes from the closed state to the open state at the end of the first time period, and controls the third switch unit to change from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the second time period.
  • the first component carrier can be switched to the second component carrier, or the second component carrier can be switched to the first component carrier through the switching of the first switch unit, the second switch unit, and the third switch unit.
  • the method shown in FIG. 12 further includes: when the first time period is later than the second time period, before the end of the second time period arrives, controlling the first local oscillator to configure the first working parameter, and the first The working parameters are applicable to the first component carrier; if the first time period is earlier than the second time period, before the end of the first time period arrives, the second local oscillator is controlled to configure the second working parameter, the second working parameter Applies to the second component carrier.
  • the first local oscillator In the case of switching from the second component carrier to the first component carrier, since the first operating parameter is configured to the first local oscillator, the first local oscillator needs a certain time (130us ⁇ 140us) to stably output the first local oscillator signal Therefore, the first local oscillator can be started in advance in the transmission process of the second component carrier, that is, the first working parameter of the first local oscillator can be configured before the end of the second time period. Therefore, at the end of the second time period, the first local oscillator has been configured with the first working parameters, and the first local oscillator does not need to wait for 130us to 140us to reach stability, thereby shortening the time between the second time period and the first time period The interruption time.
  • the second local oscillator In the case of switching from the first component carrier to the second component carrier, since the second operating parameter is configured to the second local oscillator, the second local oscillator needs a certain time (130us ⁇ 140us) to stably output the second local oscillator signal Therefore, the second local oscillator can be started in advance during the transmission process of the first component carrier, that is, the second working parameter of the second local oscillator can be configured before the end of the first time period. Therefore, at the end of the first time period, the second local oscillator has been configured with the second operating parameters, and the second local oscillator does not need to wait for 130us to 140us to reach stability, thereby shortening the time between the first time period and the second time period The interruption time.
  • the method further includes: when the first time period is later than the second time period, configuring the first working parameter to take effect at the first time, and the time difference between the first time and the start time of the first time period is greater than or equal to The stabilization time of the first local oscillator; when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, configure the second working parameter to take effect at the second time, and the time difference between the second time and the start time of the second time period is greater than or equal to Settling time of the second local oscillator.
  • the method shown in FIG. 12 may be implemented by a controller in the wireless communication device 500.
  • a controller in the wireless communication device 500.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a carrier switching method.
  • the wireless communication device 900 can realize rapid carrier switching. That is, the carrier switching method is applied to a wireless communication device, the wireless communication device includes: a plurality of transmission channels, the first transmission channel of the plurality of transmission channels is used to send data on the first component carrier in the first time period, And send data on the second component carrier in the second time period; the second transmission channel of the plurality of transmission channels is used to send data on the first component carrier in the first time period, and in the second time period Data is sent on the component carrier; the first local oscillator is used to output the first local oscillator signal; the second local oscillator is used to output the second local oscillator signal.
  • the carrier switching method includes the following steps.
  • S1301 Enable the first local oscillator to provide the first local oscillator signal for the first mixer in the first transmission channel and the second mixer in the second transmission channel in the first time period.
  • S1302 Enable the second local oscillator to provide the second local oscillator signal for the first mixer and the second mixer in the second time period.
  • the first local oscillator can be coupled with the first mixer through the first switch unit, and coupled with the second mixer through the second switch unit; the second local oscillator can be coupled with the second mixer through the third switch unit. Coupling and coupling with the first mixer through the fourth switch unit.
  • the method shown in FIG. 13 specifically includes: in the first time period, controlling the first switching unit and the second switching unit to be in the closed state, and the third switching unit and the fourth switching unit to be in the off state; in the second time period Inside, the first switch unit and the second switch unit are controlled to be in an off state, and the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit are in a closed state.
  • the method shown in FIG. 13 further includes: when the first time period is later than the second time period, controlling the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit to change from the closed state to the open state at the end of the second time period Control the first switch unit and the second switch unit to change from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the first time period; and, when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, control the first switch The unit and the second switch unit change from the closed state to the open state at the end of the first time period, and control the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit to change from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the second time period.
  • the first component carrier can be switched to the second component carrier, or the second component carrier can be switched to the first component carrier through the switching of the first switch unit, the second switch unit, the third switch unit, and the fourth switch unit. Component carrier switching.
  • the method shown in FIG. 13 further includes: when the first time period is later than the second time period, before the end of the second time period arrives, controlling the first local oscillator to configure the first working parameter, and the first The working parameters are applicable to the first component carrier; if the first time period is earlier than the second time period, before the end of the first time period arrives, the second local oscillator is controlled to configure the second working parameter, the second working parameter Applies to the second component carrier.
  • the first local oscillator In the case of switching from the second component carrier to the first component carrier, since the first operating parameter is configured to the first local oscillator, the first local oscillator needs a certain time (130us ⁇ 140us) to stably output the first local oscillator signal Therefore, the first local oscillator can be started in advance in the transmission process of the second component carrier, that is, the first working parameter of the first local oscillator can be configured before the end of the second time period. Therefore, at the end of the second time period, the first local oscillator has been configured with the first working parameters, and the first local oscillator does not need to wait for 130us to 140us to reach stability, thereby shortening the time between the second time period and the first time period The interruption time.
  • the second local oscillator In the case of switching from the first component carrier to the second component carrier, since the second operating parameter is configured to the second local oscillator, the second local oscillator needs a certain time (130us ⁇ 140us) to stably output the second local oscillator signal Therefore, the second local oscillator can be started in advance during the transmission process of the first component carrier, that is, the second working parameter of the second local oscillator can be configured before the end of the first time period. Therefore, at the end of the first time period, the second local oscillator has been configured with the second working parameters, and the second local oscillator does not need to wait for 130us to 140us to reach stability, thereby shortening the time between the first time period and the second time period The interruption time.
  • the method further includes: when the first time period is later than the second time period, configuring the first working parameter to take effect at the first time, and the time difference between the first time and the start time of the first time period is greater than or equal to The stabilization time of the first local oscillator; when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, configure the second working parameter to take effect at the second time, and the time difference between the second time and the start time of the second time period is greater than or equal to Settling time of the second local oscillator.
  • the method shown in FIG. 13 may be implemented by a controller in the wireless communication device 900, and for implementations that are not described in detail in the method shown in FIG. 13, reference may be made to related descriptions in the wireless communication device 900.

Abstract

Provided in the embodiments of the present application are a wireless communication device and a carrier switching method, which are used for reducing an interruption time of data services when carrier switching is performed. The wireless communication apparatus comprises: a plurality of transmission channels, wherein a first transmission channel of the plurality of transmission channels is used for sending data on a first member carrier in a first time period, and a second transmission channel of the plurality of transmission channels is used for sending data on the first member carrier in the first time period and sending data on a second member carrier in a second time period; a first local oscillator used for selectively providing, in the first time period, a first local oscillator signal for a first mixer in the first transmission channel and a second mixer in the second transmission channel; and a second local oscillator used for selectively providing, in the second time period, a second local oscillator signal for the second mixer.

Description

一种无线通信装置及载波切换方法Wireless communication device and carrier switching method 技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种无线通信装置及载波切换方法。This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a wireless communication device and a carrier switching method.
背景技术Background technique
为了提高通信系统的性能,一种可行的技术方案是成员载波切换(component carrier switching,CC switching)。即,终端向基站进行数据传输时可以从一个成员载波切换到另一个成员载波。其中,成员载波切换有时也被称为载波切换、载波选择。例如,当前载波的信道质量较差,则可以通过载波切换过程切换到另一信道质量更好的载波;或者,当前载波的上行时隙较少,则可以通过载波切换过程切换到另一存在较多上行时隙的载波,用于数据传输或者下行业务的HARQ-ACK(hybrid automatic repeat request acknowledgement)反馈。载波切换可以提高上行业务信道数据的吞吐量,降低下行业务信道数据的HARQ-ACK反馈时延。在终端的载波切换过程中,终端的上行数据传输可能会中断,这无疑会对系统性能产生不利的影响。不难理解,载波切换的中断时间越长,对上行数据吞吐量和下行反馈时延的影响越大。因此,为了提高上行业务信道数据的吞吐量、降低下行业务信道数据的HARQ-ACK反馈时延,存在上行载波间快速切换的需求。In order to improve the performance of the communication system, a feasible technical solution is component carrier switching (CC switching). That is, the terminal can switch from one component carrier to another component carrier when transmitting data to the base station. Among them, component carrier switching is sometimes called carrier switching or carrier selection. For example, if the channel quality of the current carrier is poor, you can switch to another carrier with better channel quality through the carrier switching process; or, if the current carrier has fewer uplink time slots, you can switch to another carrier with better channel quality through the carrier switching process. Carriers with multiple uplink time slots are used for HARQ-ACK (hybrid automatic repeat request acknowledgement) feedback for data transmission or downlink services. Carrier switching can increase the throughput of uplink traffic channel data and reduce the HARQ-ACK feedback delay of downlink traffic channel data. During the terminal's carrier switching process, the terminal's uplink data transmission may be interrupted, which will undoubtedly have an adverse effect on system performance. It is not difficult to understand that the longer the interruption time of carrier switching, the greater the impact on uplink data throughput and downlink feedback delay. Therefore, in order to improve the throughput of uplink traffic channel data and reduce the HARQ-ACK feedback delay of downlink traffic channel data, there is a need for fast switching between uplink carriers.
综上,如何进行载波间的快速切换,从而减少进行载波切换时的业务中断时间是一个亟待解决的问题。In summary, how to perform fast switching between carriers so as to reduce the service interruption time during carrier switching is an urgent problem to be solved.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请实施例提供一种无线通信装置及载波切换方法,用以在进行载波切换时减少数据业务中断时间。The embodiments of the present application provide a wireless communication device and a carrier switching method to reduce the interruption time of data services when performing carrier switching.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供一种无线通信装置,该无线通信装置包括:多个发射通道,多个发射通道中的第一发射通道用于在第一时间段内在第一成员载波上发送数据,多个发射通道中的第二发射通道用于在第一时间段内在第一成员载波上发送数据,以及在第二时间段内在第二成员载波上发送数据;第一本振,用于选择性地在第一时间段内为第一发射通道中的第一混频器以及第二发射通道中的第二混频器提供第一本振信号;第二本振,用于选择性地在第二时间段内为第二混频器提供第二本振信号。In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a wireless communication device, the wireless communication device includes: a plurality of transmission channels, a first transmission channel of the plurality of transmission channels is used to transmit on a first component carrier in a first time period Data, the second transmission channel of the multiple transmission channels is used to send data on the first component carrier in the first time period, and to send data on the second component carrier in the second time period; the first local oscillator is used for Selectively provide the first local oscillator signal for the first mixer in the first transmission channel and the second mixer in the second transmission channel in the first time period; the second local oscillator is used to selectively The second local oscillator signal is provided for the second mixer in the second time period.
其中,多个发射通道、第一本振和第二本振可以集成在第一集成电路芯片中,例如集成在射频芯片中。Wherein, the multiple transmitting channels, the first local oscillator and the second local oscillator may be integrated in the first integrated circuit chip, for example, integrated in the radio frequency chip.
采用上述方案,由于第一成员载波在第一时间段内通过第一发射通道和第二发射通道发送,因而第一本振选择性地在第一时间段内为第一混频器和第二混频器提供第一本振信号,可以实现第一混频器和第二混频根据第一本振信号进行混频,从而实现第一成员载波的发送;同样地,由于第二成员载波在第二时间段内通过第二发射通道发送,因而第二本振选择性地在第二时间段内为第二混频器提供第二本振信号,可以实现第二混频器根据第二本振信号进行混频,从而实现第二成员载波的发送。With the above solution, since the first component carrier is sent through the first transmitting channel and the second transmitting channel in the first time period, the first local oscillator is selectively used as the first mixer and the second mixer in the first time period. The mixer provides the first local oscillator signal, which can realize the mixing of the first mixer and the second mixer according to the first local oscillator signal, thereby realizing the transmission of the first component carrier; similarly, since the second component carrier is in The second local oscillator is sent through the second transmitting channel during the second time period, so the second local oscillator selectively provides the second local oscillator signal for the second mixer in the second time period, which can realize the second mixer according to the second local oscillator. The vibration signal is mixed to realize the transmission of the second component carrier.
由于通过第一本振和第二本振选择性地提供本振信号,因而在进行载波切换时可以根据第一本振信号的生效时间的需求选择性地使能第一本振输出第一本振信号,或者根据第 二本振信号的生效时间的需求选择性地使能第二本振输出第二本振信号,从而缩短中断时间。以第一时间段早于第二时间段(即从第一成员载波切换到第二成员载波)为例,在第一时间段内,第一本振输出第一本振信号;在第一本振为第一混频器和第二混频器提供第一本振信号的同时(即发送第一成员载波的同时),可以选择性地提前启动第二本振,但并不将第二本振的输出提供给第二混频器;在第一成员载波发送完成以后,可以选择性地使能第二本振生效(即将第二本振的输出提供给第二混频器),此时第二本振仅需较短的时间即能达到稳定状态,稳定地输出第二本振信号,从而在第二时间段内在第二成员载波上发送数据。也就是说,第一时间段和第二时间段的间隔时间较短,因而在进行载波切换时的业务中断时间较短,从而减小载波切换对上行数据吞吐量和下行反馈时延的影响。Since the local oscillator signal is selectively provided by the first local oscillator and the second local oscillator, the first local oscillator can be selectively enabled to output the first local oscillator according to the requirements of the effective time of the first local oscillator signal during carrier switching. Or selectively enable the second local oscillator to output the second local oscillator signal according to the requirement of the effective time of the second local oscillator signal, thereby shortening the interruption time. Taking the first time period earlier than the second time period (ie switching from the first component carrier to the second component carrier) as an example, in the first time period, the first local oscillator outputs the first local oscillator signal; While providing the first local oscillator signal to the first mixer and the second mixer (that is, while transmitting the first component carrier), the second local oscillator can be selectively activated in advance, but the second local oscillator is not The output of the oscillator is provided to the second mixer; after the transmission of the first component carrier is completed, the second local oscillator can be selectively enabled (that is, the output of the second local oscillator is provided to the second mixer). The second local oscillator only needs a short time to reach a stable state, and stably outputs the second local oscillator signal, thereby sending data on the second component carrier in the second time period. That is to say, the interval between the first time period and the second time period is short, so the service interruption time during carrier switching is short, thereby reducing the impact of carrier switching on uplink data throughput and downlink feedback delay.
在一种可能的设计中,第一本振通过第一开关单元与第一混频器耦合、通过第二开关单元与第二混频器耦合;第二本振通过第三开关单元与第二混频器耦合;在第一时间段内,第一开关单元和第二开关单元处于闭合状态,第三开关单元处于断开状态;在第二时间段内,第一开关单元和第二开关单元处于断开状态,第三开关单元处于闭合状态。In a possible design, the first local oscillator is coupled with the first mixer through the first switch unit, and is coupled with the second mixer through the second switch unit; the second local oscillator is coupled with the second mixer through the third switch unit. Mixer coupling; in the first time period, the first switch unit and the second switch unit are in the closed state, and the third switch unit is in the off state; in the second time period, the first switch unit and the second switch unit In the open state, the third switch unit is in the closed state.
采用上述方案,可以通过第一开关单元、第二开关单元和第三开关单元的切换来实现选择性地为第一混频器提供第一本振信号以及为第二混频器提供第一本振信号和第二本振信号。With the above solution, the first switch unit, the second switch unit, and the third switch unit can be switched to selectively provide the first local oscillator signal for the first mixer and provide the first local oscillator for the second mixer. Oscillation signal and second local oscillation signal.
此外,该无线通信装置还可以包括:控制器,用于在第一时间段晚于第二时间段的情况下,控制第三开关单元在第二时间段的结束时刻从闭合状态变为断开状态,控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元在第一时间段的开始时刻从断开状态变为闭合状态;以及,在第一时间段早于第二时间段的情况下,控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元在第一时间段的结束时刻由闭合状态变为断开状态,控制第三开关单元在第二时间段的开始时刻由断开状态变为闭合状态。In addition, the wireless communication device may further include: a controller for controlling the third switch unit to change from a closed state to an open state at the end of the second time period when the first time period is later than the second time period Control the first switch unit and the second switch unit to change from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the first time period; and, when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, control the first switch The unit and the second switch unit change from the closed state to the open state at the end of the first time period, and control the third switch unit to change from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the second time period.
采用上述方案,在第一时间段晚于第二时间段的情况下,在第二时间段的结束时刻第二成员载波已发送完毕,因而此时控制器可以控制第三开关单元从闭合状态变为断开状态,停止第二成员载波的发送;在第一时间段的开始时刻需要开始发送第一成员载波,因而此时控制器可以控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元从断开状态变为闭合状态,开始第一成员载波的发送。在第一时间段早于第二时间段的情况下,在第一时间段的结束时刻第一成员载波已发送完毕,因而此时控制器可以控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元在第一时间段的结束时刻由闭合状态变为断开状态,停止第一成员载波的发送;在第二时间段的开始时刻需要开始发送第二成员载波,因而此时控制器可以控制第三开关单元由断开状态变为闭合状态,开始第二成员载波的发送。With the above solution, when the first time period is later than the second time period, the second component carrier has been transmitted at the end of the second time period, so the controller can control the third switch unit to change from the closed state. In the disconnected state, the transmission of the second component carrier is stopped; at the beginning of the first time period, the transmission of the first component carrier needs to be started, so at this time the controller can control the first switching unit and the second switching unit to change from the disconnected state. In the closed state, the transmission of the first component carrier is started. In the case that the first time period is earlier than the second time period, the first component carrier has been transmitted at the end of the first time period, so at this time the controller can control the first switch unit and the second switch unit in the first time period. The end time of the time period changes from the closed state to the open state, and the transmission of the first component carrier is stopped; at the beginning of the second time period, it is necessary to start sending the second component carrier. Therefore, the controller can control the third switch unit by The disconnected state is changed to the closed state, and the transmission of the second component carrier is started.
在一种可能的设计中,该控制器还用于:在第一时间段晚于第二时间段的情况下,在第二时间段的结束时刻到来之前,向第一本振发送第一控制信号,第一控制信号用于指示第一本振配置第一工作参数,第一工作参数适用于第一成员载波;在第一时间段早于第二时间段的情况下,在第一时间段的结束时刻到来之前,向第二本振发送第二控制信号,第二控制信号用于指示第二本振配置第二工作参数,第二工作参数适用于第二成员载波。In a possible design, the controller is also used for: in the case that the first time period is later than the second time period, before the end of the second time period arrives, send the first control to the first local oscillator Signal, the first control signal is used to instruct the first local oscillator to configure the first working parameter, and the first working parameter is applicable to the first component carrier; when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, the first time period Before the end time of, send a second control signal to the second local oscillator, the second control signal is used to instruct the second local oscillator to configure the second working parameter, and the second working parameter is applicable to the second component carrier.
采用上述方案,在从第二成员载波切换到第一成员载波的情况下,可以在第二成员载波的发送过程中提前启动第一本振,即在第二时间段的结束时刻开始之前即配置第一本振的第一工作参数,使得第一本振可以提前启动;在从第一成员载波切换到第二成员载波的情况下,可以在第一成员载波的发送过程中提前启动第二本振,即在第一时间段的结束时 刻开始之前即配置第二本振的第二工作参数,使得第二本振可以提前启动。With the above solution, in the case of switching from the second component carrier to the first component carrier, the first local oscillator can be activated in advance during the transmission process of the second component carrier, that is, it is configured before the end of the second time period. The first working parameter of the first local oscillator enables the first local oscillator to be started in advance; in the case of switching from the first component carrier to the second component carrier, the second local oscillator can be started in advance during the transmission of the first component carrier Vibrate, that is, configure the second working parameter of the second local oscillator before the end of the first time period starts, so that the second local oscillator can be started in advance.
进一步地,控制器还用于:在第一时间段晚于第二时间段的情况下,配置第一工作参数在第一时刻生效,第一时刻与第一时间段的开始时刻的时间差大于或等于第一本振的稳定时间;在第一时间段早于第二时间段的情况下,配置第二工作参数在第二时刻生效,第二时刻与第二时间段的开始时刻的时间差大于或等于第二本振的稳定时间。Further, the controller is also used to configure the first working parameter to take effect at the first time when the first time period is later than the second time period, and the time difference between the first time and the start time of the first time period is greater than or Equal to the stabilization time of the first local oscillator; when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, the second working parameter is configured to take effect at the second time, and the time difference between the second time and the start time of the second time period is greater than or Equal to the stabilization time of the second local oscillator.
采用上述方案,在第一时间段晚于第二时间段的情况下,可以使得第一本振在第一时间段的开始时刻能够稳定输出第一本振信号。在第一时间段早于第二时间段的情况下,可以使得第二本振在第二时间段的开始时刻能够稳定输出第二本振信号。With the above solution, when the first time period is later than the second time period, the first local oscillator can stably output the first local oscillator signal at the beginning of the first time period. In the case that the first time period is earlier than the second time period, the second local oscillator can stably output the second local oscillator signal at the beginning of the second time period.
在一种可能的设计中,第一成员载波可以为新空口上行链路NR UL上双天线发送的载波,第二成员载波可以为长期演进上行链路LTE UL上单天线发送的载波。或者,第一成员载波为LTE UL上双天线发送的载波,第二成员载波为NR UL上单天线发送的载波。In a possible design, the first component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on the new air interface uplink NR UL, and the second component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by a single antenna on the Long Term Evolution uplink LTE UL. Or, the first component carrier is a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on LTE UL, and the second component carrier is a carrier transmitted by single antenna on NR UL.
其中,第一成员载波和第二成员载波可以用于非独立部署NSA组网。Among them, the first component carrier and the second component carrier can be used for non-independent deployment of NSA networking.
在另一种可能的设计中,第一成员载波可以为NR UL上双天线发送的载波,第二成员载波可以为SUL上单天线发送的载波。In another possible design, the first component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on NR UL, and the second component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by single antenna on SUL.
其中,第一成员载波和第二成员载波可以用于NSA组网的NR节点;或者,第一成员载波和第二成员载波可以用于独立部署SA组网。Among them, the first component carrier and the second component carrier can be used for the NR node of the NSA networking; or, the first component carrier and the second component carrier can be used for the independent deployment of the SA networking.
在又一种可能的设计中,第一成员载波为NR UL上双天线发送的载波,第二成员载波为NR UL上单天线发送的载波;或者,第一成员载波为LTE UL上双天线发送的载波,第二成员载波为LTE UL上单天线发送的载波。In another possible design, the first component carrier is a carrier for dual-antenna transmission on NR UL, and the second component carrier is a carrier for single antenna transmission on NR UL; or, the first component carrier is dual-antenna transmission on LTE UL The second component carrier is a carrier transmitted by a single antenna on LTE UL.
其中,第一成员载波和第二成员载波用于隶属相同无线接入技术RAT的双连接DC组网。Among them, the first component carrier and the second component carrier are used in a dual-connection DC networking that belongs to the same radio access technology RAT.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供一种无线通信装置。该无线通信装置包括:多个发射通道,多个发射通道中的第一发射通道用于在第一时间段内在第一成员载波上发送数据,以及在第二时间段内在第二成员载波上发送数据;多个发射通道中的第二发射通道用于在第一时间段内在第一成员载波上发送数据,以及在第二时间段内在第二成员载波上发送数据;第一本振,用于选择性地在第一时间段内为第一发射通道中的第一混频器以及第二发射通道中的第二混频器提供第一本振信号;第二本振,用于选择性地在第二时间段内为第一混频器和第二混频器提供第二本振信号。In the second aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a wireless communication device. The wireless communication device includes: a plurality of transmission channels, a first transmission channel of the plurality of transmission channels is used to send data on a first component carrier in a first time period, and to send data on a second component carrier in a second time period Data; the second transmission channel of the multiple transmission channels is used to send data on the first component carrier in the first time period, and to send data on the second component carrier in the second time period; the first local oscillator is used for Selectively provide the first local oscillator signal for the first mixer in the first transmission channel and the second mixer in the second transmission channel in the first time period; the second local oscillator is used to selectively The second local oscillator signal is provided for the first mixer and the second mixer in the second time period.
其中,第一混频器、第二混频器、第一本振电路和第二本振电路可以集成在第一集成电路芯片中,例如集成在射频芯片中。Wherein, the first mixer, the second mixer, the first local oscillator circuit, and the second local oscillator circuit may be integrated in the first integrated circuit chip, for example, integrated in the radio frequency chip.
采用上述方案,由于第一成员载波在第一时间段内通过第一发射通道和第二发射通道发送,因而第一本振选择性地在第一时间段内为第一混频器和第二混频器提供第一本振信号,可以实现第一混频器和第二混频根据第一本振信号进行混频,从而实现第一成员载波的发送;同样地,由于第二成员载波在第二时间段内通过第一发射通道和第二发射通道发送,因而第二本振选择性地在第二时间段内为第一混频器和第二混频器提供第二本振信号,可以实现第一混频器和第二混频根据第二本振信号进行混频,从而实现第一成员载波的发送。With the above solution, since the first component carrier is sent through the first transmitting channel and the second transmitting channel in the first time period, the first local oscillator is selectively used as the first mixer and the second mixer in the first time period. The mixer provides the first local oscillator signal, which can realize the mixing of the first mixer and the second mixer according to the first local oscillator signal, thereby realizing the transmission of the first component carrier; similarly, since the second component carrier is in In the second time period, it is sent through the first transmitting channel and the second transmitting channel, so the second local oscillator selectively provides the second local oscillator signal for the first mixer and the second mixer in the second time period, The first mixer and the second mixer can be mixed according to the second local oscillator signal, so as to realize the transmission of the first component carrier.
由于通过第一本振和第二本振选择性地提供本振信号,因而在进行载波切换时可以根据第一本振信号的生效时间的需求选择性地使能第一本振输出第一本振信号,或者根据第 二本振信号的生效时间的需求选择性地使能第二本振输出第二本振信号,从而缩短中断时间。以第一时间段早于第二时间段(即从第一成员载波切换到第二成员载波)为例,在第一时间段内,第一本振输出第一本振信号;在第一本振为第一混频器和第二混频器提供第一本振信号的同时(即发送第一成员载波的同时),可以选择性地提前启动第二本振,但并不将第二本振的输出提供给第二混频器;在第一成员载波发送完成以后,可以选择性地使能第二本振生效(即将第二本振的输出提供给第二混频器),此时由于第二本振已提前启动,因而仅需较短的时间即能达到稳定状态,稳定地输出第二本振信号,从而在第二时间段内在第二成员载波上发送数据。由于第一时间段和第二时间段的间隔时间较短,因而在进行载波切换时的业务中断时间较短,从而减小载波切换对上行数据吞吐量和下行反馈时延的影响。Since the local oscillator signal is selectively provided by the first local oscillator and the second local oscillator, the first local oscillator can be selectively enabled to output the first local oscillator according to the requirements of the effective time of the first local oscillator signal during carrier switching. Or selectively enable the second local oscillator to output the second local oscillator signal according to the requirement of the effective time of the second local oscillator signal, thereby shortening the interruption time. Taking the first time period earlier than the second time period (ie switching from the first component carrier to the second component carrier) as an example, in the first time period, the first local oscillator outputs the first local oscillator signal; While providing the first local oscillator signal to the first mixer and the second mixer (that is, while transmitting the first component carrier), the second local oscillator can be selectively activated in advance, but the second local oscillator is not The output of the oscillator is provided to the second mixer; after the transmission of the first component carrier is completed, the second local oscillator can be selectively enabled (that is, the output of the second local oscillator is provided to the second mixer). Since the second local oscillator has been activated in advance, it only takes a short time to reach a stable state, and stably output the second local oscillator signal, thereby sending data on the second component carrier in the second time period. Since the interval between the first time period and the second time period is short, the service interruption time during carrier switching is short, thereby reducing the influence of carrier switching on uplink data throughput and downlink feedback delay.
在一种可能的设计中,第一本振通过第一开关单元与第一混频器耦合、通过第二开关单元与第二混频器耦合;第二本振通过第三开关单元与第二混频器耦合、通过第四开关单元与第一混频器耦合;在第一时间段内,第一开关单元和第二开关单元处于闭合状态,第三开关单元和第四开关单元处于断开状态;在第二时间段内,第一开关单元和第二开关单元处于断开状态,第三开关单元和第四开关单元处于闭合状态。In a possible design, the first local oscillator is coupled with the first mixer through the first switch unit, and is coupled with the second mixer through the second switch unit; the second local oscillator is coupled with the second mixer through the third switch unit. The mixer is coupled to the first mixer through the fourth switch unit; in the first time period, the first switch unit and the second switch unit are in the closed state, and the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit are in the open state State; In the second time period, the first switch unit and the second switch unit are in the off state, and the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit are in the closed state.
采用上述方案,可以通过第一开关单元、第二开关单元、第三开关单元和第四开关单元的切换来实现选择性地为第一混频器提供第一本振信号和第二本振信号,以及为第二混频器提供第一本振信号和第二本振信号。With the above solution, the first switch unit, the second switch unit, the third switch unit, and the fourth switch unit can be switched to selectively provide the first local oscillator signal and the second local oscillator signal to the first mixer. , And provide the first local oscillator signal and the second local oscillator signal for the second mixer.
在一种可能的设计中,第二方面提供的无线通信装置还可以包括控制器,该控制器用于在第一时间段晚于第二时间段的情况下,控制第三开关单元和第四开关单元在第二时间段的结束时刻从闭合状态变为断开状态,控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元在第一时间段的开始时刻从断开状态变为闭合状态;以及,在第一时间段早于第二时间段的情况下,控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元在第一时间段的结束时刻由闭合状态变为断开状态,控制第三开关单元和第四开关单元在第二时间段的开始时刻由断开状态变为闭合状态。In a possible design, the wireless communication device provided in the second aspect may further include a controller for controlling the third switch unit and the fourth switch when the first time period is later than the second time period The unit changes from the closed state to the open state at the end of the second time period, and controls the first switching unit and the second switching unit to change from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the first time period; When the time period is earlier than the second time period, control the first switching unit and the second switching unit to change from the closed state to the open state at the end of the first time period, and control the third and fourth switching units to The start moment of the second time period changes from the open state to the closed state.
采用上述方案,在第一时间段晚于第二时间段的情况下,在第二时间段的结束时刻第二成员载波已发送完毕,因而此时控制器可以控制第三开关单元和第四开关单元从闭合状态变为断开状态,停止第二成员载波的发送;在第一时间段的开始时刻需要开始发送第一成员载波,因而此时控制器可以控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元从断开状态变为闭合状态,开始第一成员载波的发送。在第一时间段早于第二时间段的情况下,在第一时间段的结束时刻第一成员载波已发送完毕,因而此时控制器可以控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元在第一时间段的结束时刻由闭合状态变为断开状态,停止第一成员载波的发送;在第二时间段的开始时刻需要开始发送第二成员载波,因而此时控制器可以控制第三开关单元和第四开关单元由断开状态变为闭合状态,开始第二成员载波的发送。With the above solution, when the first time period is later than the second time period, the second component carrier has been transmitted at the end of the second time period, so the controller can control the third switch unit and the fourth switch at this time The unit changes from the closed state to the open state, and stops sending the second component carrier; at the beginning of the first time period, it needs to start sending the first component carrier, so the controller can control the first switching unit and the second switching unit at this time From the open state to the closed state, the transmission of the first component carrier is started. In the case that the first time period is earlier than the second time period, the first component carrier has been transmitted at the end of the first time period, so at this time the controller can control the first switch unit and the second switch unit in the first time period. The end time of the time period changes from the closed state to the open state, and the transmission of the first component carrier is stopped; at the beginning of the second time period, it is necessary to start sending the second component carrier, so the controller can control the third switch unit and The fourth switch unit changes from the open state to the closed state, and starts the transmission of the second component carrier.
此外,上述控制器还可以用于:在第一时间段晚于第二时间段的情况下,在第二时间段的结束时刻到来之前,向第一本振发送第一控制信号,第一控制信号用于指示第一本振配置第一工作参数,第一工作参数适用于第一成员载波;在第一时间段早于第二时间段的情况下,在第一时间段的结束时刻到来之前,向第二本振发送第二控制信号,第二控制信号用于指示第二本振配置第二工作参数,第二工作参数适用于第二成员载波。In addition, the above-mentioned controller may also be used to send a first control signal to the first local oscillator before the end of the second time period arrives when the first time period is later than the second time period. The signal is used to instruct the first local oscillator to configure the first working parameter, and the first working parameter is applicable to the first component carrier; when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, before the end of the first time period arrives , Sending a second control signal to the second local oscillator, where the second control signal is used to instruct the second local oscillator to configure the second working parameter, and the second working parameter is applicable to the second component carrier.
采用上述方案,在从第二成员载波切换到第一成员载波的情况下,可以在第二成员载波的发送过程中提前启动第一本振,即在第二时间段的结束时刻开始之前即配置第一本振 的第一工作参数,使得第一本振可以提前启动。在从第一成员载波切换到第二成员载波的情况下,可以在第一成员载波的发送过程中提前启动第二本振,即在第一时间段的结束时刻开始之前即配置第二本振的第二工作参数,使得第二本振可以提前启动。With the above solution, in the case of switching from the second component carrier to the first component carrier, the first local oscillator can be activated in advance during the transmission process of the second component carrier, that is, it is configured before the end of the second time period. The first working parameter of the first local oscillator enables the first local oscillator to be started in advance. In the case of switching from the first component carrier to the second component carrier, the second local oscillator can be started in advance during the transmission of the first component carrier, that is, the second local oscillator is configured before the end of the first time period. The second working parameter of the, so that the second local oscillator can be started in advance.
进一步地,该控制器还用于:在第一时间段晚于第二时间段的情况下,配置第一工作参数在第一时刻生效,第一时刻与第一时间段的开始时刻的时间差大于或等于第一本振的稳定时间;在第一时间段早于第二时间段的情况下,配置第二工作参数在第二时刻生效,第二时刻与第二时间段的开始时刻的时间差大于或等于第二本振的稳定时间。Further, the controller is further configured to configure the first working parameter to take effect at the first time when the first time period is later than the second time period, and the time difference between the first time and the start time of the first time period is greater than Or equal to the stabilization time of the first local oscillator; when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, the second working parameter is configured to take effect at the second time, and the time difference between the second time and the start time of the second time period is greater than Or equal to the stabilization time of the second local oscillator.
采用上述方案,在从第二成员载波切换到第一成员载波的情况下,可以使得第一本振在第一时间段的开始时刻能够稳定输出第一本振信号。在从第一成员载波切换到第二成员载波的情况下,可以使得第二本振在第二时间段的开始时刻能够稳定输出第二本振信号。With the above solution, in the case of switching from the second component carrier to the first component carrier, the first local oscillator can stably output the first local oscillator signal at the beginning of the first time period. In the case of switching from the first component carrier to the second component carrier, the second local oscillator can stably output the second local oscillator signal at the beginning of the second time period.
在一种可能的设计中,第一成员载波可以为NR UL上双天线发送的载波,第二成员载波可以为LTE UL上双天线发送的载波。In a possible design, the first component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on NR UL, and the second component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on LTE UL.
其中,第一成员载波和第二成员载波可以用于非独立部署NSA组网。Among them, the first component carrier and the second component carrier can be used for non-independent deployment of NSA networking.
在又一种可能的设计中,第一成员载波为NR UL上双天线发送的载波,第二成员载波为NR UL上双天线发送的载波;或者,第一成员载波为LTE UL上双天线发送的载波,第二成员载波为LTE UL上双天线发送的载波。In another possible design, the first component carrier is a carrier for dual-antenna transmission on NR UL, and the second component carrier is a carrier for dual-antenna transmission on NR UL; or, the first component carrier is a dual-antenna transmission on LTE UL. The second component carrier is the carrier for dual-antenna transmission on LTE UL.
其中,第一成员载波和第二成员载波用于隶属相同RAT的DC组网。Among them, the first component carrier and the second component carrier are used for DC networking belonging to the same RAT.
第三方面,本申请实施例还提供一种载波切换方法,该方法可以应用于第一方面提供的无线通信装置中。具体地,该无线通信装置包括:多个发射通道,多个发射通道中的第一发射通道用于在第一时间段内在第一成员载波上发送数据,多个发射通道中的第二发射通道用于在第一时间段内在第一成员载波上发送数据,以及在第二时间段内在第二成员载波上发送数据;第一本振,用于输出第一本振信号;第二本振,用于输出第二本振信号。In the third aspect, embodiments of the present application also provide a carrier switching method, which can be applied to the wireless communication device provided in the first aspect. Specifically, the wireless communication device includes: a plurality of transmission channels, a first transmission channel of the plurality of transmission channels is used to transmit data on a first component carrier in a first time period, and a second transmission channel of the plurality of transmission channels Used to send data on the first component carrier in the first time period, and to send data on the second component carrier in the second time period; the first local oscillator is used to output the first local oscillator signal; the second local oscillator, Used to output the second local oscillator signal.
该方法包括:使能第一本振在第一时间段内为第一发射通道中的第一混频器和第二发射通道中的第二混频器提供第一本振信号;使能第二本振在第二时间段内为第二混频器提供第二本振信号。The method includes: enabling a first local oscillator to provide a first local oscillator signal for a first mixer in a first transmission channel and a second mixer in a second transmission channel within a first time period; The second local oscillator provides the second local oscillator signal for the second mixer in the second time period.
在一种可能的设计中,第一本振通过第一开关单元与第一混频器耦合、通过第二开关单元与第二混频器耦合;第二本振通过第三开关单元与第二混频器耦合;那么,第三方面提供的方法具体包括:在第一时间段内,控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元处于闭合状态,第三开关单元处于断开状态;在第二时间段内,控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元处于断开状态,第三开关单元处于闭合状态。In a possible design, the first local oscillator is coupled with the first mixer through the first switch unit, and is coupled with the second mixer through the second switch unit; the second local oscillator is coupled with the second mixer through the third switch unit. Mixer coupling; then, the method provided by the third aspect specifically includes: in the first time period, controlling the first switching unit and the second switching unit to be in the closed state, and the third switching unit to be in the open state; in the second time In the segment, the first switch unit and the second switch unit are controlled to be in an off state, and the third switch unit is in a closed state.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:在第一时间段晚于第二时间段的情况下,控制第三开关单元在第二时间段的结束时刻从闭合状态变为断开状态,控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元在第一时间段的开始时刻从断开状态变为闭合状态;以及,在第一时间段早于第二时间段的情况下,控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元在第一时间段的结束时刻由闭合状态变为断开状态,控制第三开关单元在第二时间段的开始时刻由断开状态变为闭合状态。In a possible design, the method further includes: when the first time period is later than the second time period, controlling the third switch unit to change from the closed state to the open state at the end of the second time period, Control the first switching unit and the second switching unit to change from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the first time period; and, when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, control the first switching unit and The second switch unit changes from the closed state to the open state at the end of the first time period, and controls the third switch unit to change from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the second time period.
此外,该方法还包括:在第一时间段晚于第二时间段的情况下,在第二时间段的结束时刻到来之前,控制第一本振配置第一工作参数,第一工作参数适用于第一成员载波;在第一时间段早于第二时间段的情况下,在第一时间段的结束时刻到来之前,控制第二本振配置第二工作参数,第二工作参数适用于第二成员载波。In addition, the method further includes: when the first time period is later than the second time period, before the end of the second time period arrives, controlling the first local oscillator to configure the first working parameter, and the first working parameter is applicable to The first component carrier; in the case that the first time period is earlier than the second time period, before the end of the first time period arrives, the second local oscillator is controlled to configure the second working parameter, and the second working parameter is applicable to the second Component carrier.
进一步地,该方法还包括:在第一时间段晚于第二时间段的情况下,配置第一工作参数在第一时刻生效,第一时刻与第一时间段的开始时刻的时间差大于或等于第一本振的稳定时间;在第一时间段早于第二时间段的情况下,配置第二工作参数在第二时刻生效,第二时刻与第二时间段的开始时刻的时间差大于或等于第二本振的稳定时间。Further, the method further includes: when the first time period is later than the second time period, configuring the first working parameter to take effect at the first time, and the time difference between the first time and the start time of the first time period is greater than or equal to The stabilization time of the first local oscillator; when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, configure the second working parameter to take effect at the second time, and the time difference between the second time and the start time of the second time period is greater than or equal to Settling time of the second local oscillator.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供一种载波切换方法,该方法应用于第二方面提供的无线通信装置中。具体地,该无线通信装置包括:多个发射通道,多个发射通道中的第一发射通道用于在第一时间段内在第一成员载波上发送数据,以及在第二时间段内在第二成员载波上发送数据;多个发射通道中的第二发射通道用于在第一时间段内在第一成员载波上发送数据,以及在第二时间段内在第二成员载波上发送数据;第一本振,用于输出第一本振信号;第二本振,用于输出第二本振信号。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a carrier switching method, which is applied to the wireless communication device provided in the second aspect. Specifically, the wireless communication device includes: a plurality of transmission channels, a first transmission channel of the plurality of transmission channels is used to transmit data on a first component carrier in a first time period, and to transmit data on a second member carrier in a second time period Data is sent on the carrier; the second transmission channel of the multiple transmission channels is used to send data on the first component carrier in the first time period, and to send data on the second component carrier in the second time period; the first local oscillator , Used to output the first local oscillator signal; the second local oscillator, used to output the second local oscillator signal.
该方法包括:使能第一本振在第一时间段内为第一发射通道中的第一混频器和第二发射通道中的第二混频器提供第一本振信号;使能第二本振在第二时间段内为第一混频器和第二混频器提供第二本振信号。The method includes: enabling a first local oscillator to provide a first local oscillator signal for a first mixer in a first transmission channel and a second mixer in a second transmission channel within a first time period; The two local oscillators provide a second local oscillator signal for the first mixer and the second mixer in the second time period.
在一种可能的设计中,第一本振通过第一开关单元与第一混频器耦合、通过第二开关单元与第二混频器耦合;第二本振通过第三开关单元与第二混频器耦合、通过第四开关单元与第一混频器耦合。那么,第四方面提供的方法具体包括:在第一时间段内,控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元处于闭合状态,第三开关单元和第四开关单元处于断开状态;在第二时间段内,控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元处于断开状态,第三开关单元和第四开关单元处于闭合状态。In a possible design, the first local oscillator is coupled with the first mixer through the first switch unit, and is coupled with the second mixer through the second switch unit; the second local oscillator is coupled with the second mixer through the third switch unit. The mixer is coupled to the first mixer through the fourth switch unit. Then, the method provided by the fourth aspect specifically includes: controlling the first switch unit and the second switch unit to be in the closed state, and the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit to be in the open state during the first time period; In the segment, the first switch unit and the second switch unit are controlled to be in an off state, and the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit are in a closed state.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:在第一时间段晚于第二时间段的情况下,控制第三开关单元和第四开关单元在第二时间段的结束时刻从闭合状态变为断开状态,控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元在第一时间段的开始时刻从断开状态变为闭合状态;以及,在第一时间段早于第二时间段的情况下,控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元在第一时间段的结束时刻由闭合状态变为断开状态,控制第三开关单元和第四开关单元在第二时间段的开始时刻由断开状态变为闭合状态。In a possible design, the method further includes: when the first time period is later than the second time period, controlling the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit to change from the closed state at the end of the second time period In the open state, control the first switch unit and the second switch unit to change from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the first time period; and, when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, control The first switch unit and the second switch unit change from the closed state to the open state at the end of the first time period, and control the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit to change from the open state to the open state at the beginning of the second time period Closed state.
此外,该方法还包括:在第一时间段晚于第二时间段的情况下,在第二时间段的结束时刻到来之前,控制第一本振配置第一工作参数,第一工作参数适用于第一成员载波;在第一时间段早于第二时间段的情况下,在第一时间段的结束时刻到来之前,控制第二本振配置第二工作参数,第二工作参数适用于第二成员载波。In addition, the method further includes: when the first time period is later than the second time period, before the end of the second time period arrives, controlling the first local oscillator to configure the first working parameter, and the first working parameter is applicable to The first component carrier; in the case that the first time period is earlier than the second time period, before the end of the first time period arrives, the second local oscillator is controlled to configure the second working parameter, and the second working parameter is applicable to the second Component carrier.
进一步地,该方法还包括:在第一时间段晚于第二时间段的情况下,配置第一工作参数在第一时刻生效,第一时刻与第一时间段的开始时刻的时间差大于或等于第一本振的稳定时间;在第一时间段早于第二时间段的情况下,配置第二工作参数在第二时刻生效,第二时刻与第二时间段的开始时刻的时间差大于或等于第二本振的稳定时间。Further, the method further includes: when the first time period is later than the second time period, configuring the first working parameter to take effect at the first time, and the time difference between the first time and the start time of the first time period is greater than or equal to The stabilization time of the first local oscillator; when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, configure the second working parameter to take effect at the second time, and the time difference between the second time and the start time of the second time period is greater than or equal to Settling time of the second local oscillator.
另外,第三方面中任一种可能设计方式所带来的技术效果可参见第一方面中不同设计方式所带来的技术效果,第四方面中任一种可能设计方式所带来的技术效果可参见第二方面中不同设计方式所带来的技术效果,此处不再赘述。In addition, the technical effects brought by any of the possible design methods in the third aspect can be referred to the technical effects brought by the different design methods in the first aspect, and the technical effects brought by any of the possible design methods in the fourth aspect You can refer to the technical effects brought about by different design methods in the second aspect, which will not be repeated here.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种无线通信系统的结构示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless communication system provided by an embodiment of this application;
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种终端的载波切换的流程示意图;FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a flow of carrier switching of a terminal according to an embodiment of the application;
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种终端的结构示意图;FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal provided by an embodiment of the application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的另一种终端的结构示意图;FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of another terminal provided by an embodiment of the application;
图5为本申请实施例提供的第一种无线通信装置的结构示意图;FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of a first wireless communication device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图6为本申请实施例提供的第二种无线通信装置的结构示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a second wireless communication device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图7为本申请实施例提供的一种载波切换时中断时间在空口符号上的示意图;FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of the interruption time on the air interface symbol during carrier switching according to an embodiment of the application;
图8为本申请实施例提供的第三种无线通信装置的结构示意图;FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a third wireless communication device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的第四种无线通信装置的结构示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a fourth wireless communication device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的第五种无线通信装置的结构示意图;10 is a schematic structural diagram of a fifth wireless communication device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图11为本申请实施例提供的第六种无线通信装置的结构示意图;FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a sixth wireless communication device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图12为本申请实施例提供的一种载波切换方法的流程示意图;FIG. 12 is a schematic flowchart of a carrier switching method provided by an embodiment of this application;
图13为本申请实施例提供的另一种载波切换方法的流程示意图。FIG. 13 is a schematic flowchart of another carrier switching method provided by an embodiment of this application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面结合附图并举实施例,对本申请提供的技术方案作进一步说明。应理解,本申请实施例中提供的系统结构和业务场景主要是为了解释本申请的技术方案的一些可能的实施方式,不应被解读为对本申请的技术方案的唯一性限定。本领域普通技术人员可以知晓,随着系统的演进,以及更新的业务场景的出现,本申请提供的技术方案对于相同或类似的技术问题仍然可以适用。The technical solutions provided by the present application will be further described below in conjunction with the drawings and embodiments. It should be understood that the system structure and business scenarios provided in the embodiments of this application are mainly for explaining some possible implementation manners of the technical solution of this application, and should not be interpreted as a unique limitation to the technical solution of this application. Those of ordinary skill in the art can know that with the evolution of the system and the emergence of newer business scenarios, the technical solutions provided in this application are still applicable to the same or similar technical problems.
应理解,本申请实施例提供的技术方案,包括无线通信装置及载波切换方法。这些技术方案解决问题的原理相同或相似,在以下具体实施例的介绍中,某些重复之处可能不再赘述,但应视为这些具体实施例之间已有相互引用,可以相互结合。It should be understood that the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application include wireless communication devices and carrier switching methods. The principles for solving the problems of these technical solutions are the same or similar. In the description of the following specific embodiments, some repetitions may not be repeated, but it should be considered that these specific embodiments have been mutually cited and can be combined with each other.
无线通信系统中,设备可分为提供无线网络服务的设备和使用无线网络服务的设备。提供无线网络服务的设备是指那些组成无线通信网络的设备,可简称为网络设备(network equipment),或网络单元(network element)。网络设备通常归属于运营商或基础设施提供商,并由这些厂商负责运营或维护。网络设备还可进一步分为无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)设备以及核心网(core network,CN)设备。典型的RAN设备包括基站(base station,BS)。In a wireless communication system, devices can be divided into devices that provide wireless network services and devices that use wireless network services. Devices that provide wireless network services refer to those devices that make up a wireless communication network, which can be referred to as network equipment or network elements for short. Network equipment usually belongs to operators or infrastructure providers, and these vendors are responsible for operation or maintenance. Network equipment can be further divided into radio access network (RAN) equipment and core network (CN) equipment. A typical RAN device includes a base station (BS).
应理解,基站有时也可以被称为无线接入点(access point,AP),或发送接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)。具体地,基站可以是5G新空口(new radio,NR)系统中的通用节点B(generation Node B,gNB),4G长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统的演进节点B(evolutional Node B,eNB)。根据基站的物理形态或发射功率的不同,基站可被分为宏基站(macro base station)或微基站(micro base station)。微基站有时也被称为小基站或小小区(small cell)。It should be understood that the base station may sometimes be referred to as a wireless access point (access point, AP) or a transmission reception point (transmission reception point, TRP). Specifically, the base station may be a general node B (generation Node B, gNB) in a 5G new radio (NR) system, or an evolution node B (evolutional Node B, eNB) in a 4G long term evolution (LTE) system. ). According to the physical form or transmit power of the base station, the base station can be divided into a macro base station or a micro base station. Micro base stations are sometimes called small base stations or small cells.
使用无线网络服务的设备通常位于网络的边缘,可简称为终端(terminal)。终端能够与网络设备建立连接,并基于网络设备的服务为用户提供具体的无线通信业务。应理解,由于终端与用户的关系更加紧密,有时也被称为用户设备(user equipment,UE),或订户单元(subscriber unit,SU)。此外,相对于通常在固定地点放置的基站,终端往往随着用户一起移动,有时也被称为移动台(mobile station,MS)。此外,有些网络设备,例如中 继节点(relay node,RN)或者无线路由器等,由于具备UE身份,或者归属于用户,有时也可被认为是终端。Devices that use wireless network services are usually located at the edge of the network and can be referred to as terminals for short. The terminal can establish a connection with the network device, and provide users with specific wireless communication services based on the service of the network device. It should be understood that because the relationship between the terminal and the user is closer, it is sometimes called a user equipment (UE) or a subscriber unit (SU). In addition, compared to base stations that are usually placed in fixed locations, terminals tend to move with users, and are sometimes referred to as mobile stations (MS). In addition, some network devices, such as relay nodes (RN) or wireless routers, etc., may also be considered as terminals due to their UE identity or belonging to users.
具体地,终端可以是移动电话(mobile phone)、平板电脑(tablet computer)、膝上型电脑(laptop computer)、可穿戴设备(比如智能手表、智能手环、智能头盔、智能眼镜),以及其他具备无线接入能力的设备,如智能汽车,各种物联网(internet of thing,IOT)设备,包括各种智能家居设备(比如智能电表和智能家电)以及智能城市设备(比如安防或监控设备,智能道路交通设施)等。Specifically, the terminal can be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a laptop computer, a wearable device (such as smart watches, smart bracelets, smart helmets, smart glasses), and others Devices with wireless access capabilities, such as smart cars, various Internet of Things (IOT) devices, including various smart home devices (such as smart meters and smart home appliances) and smart city devices (such as security or surveillance equipment, Intelligent road traffic facilities) etc.
为了便于表述,本申请中将以基站和终端为例,详细说明本申请实施例的技术方案。For ease of presentation, this application will take base stations and terminals as examples to describe in detail the technical solutions of the embodiments of this application.
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种无线通信系统的结构示意图。如图1所示,无线通信系统包括终端和基站。按照传输方向的不同,从终端到基站的传输链路记为上行链路(uplink,UL),从基站到终端的传输链路记为下行链路(downlink,DL)。相类似地,上行链路中的数据传输可以称为上行数据传输或上行传输,下行链路中的数据传输可以称为下行数据传输或下行传输。FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless communication system provided by an embodiment of this application. As shown in Figure 1, the wireless communication system includes a terminal and a base station. According to different transmission directions, the transmission link from the terminal to the base station is recorded as uplink (UL), and the transmission link from the base station to the terminal is recorded as downlink (DL). Similarly, data transmission in the uplink can be referred to as uplink data transmission or uplink transmission, and data transmission in the downlink can be referred to as downlink data transmission or downlink transmission.
该无线通信系统中,基站可通过集成或外接的天线设备,为特定地理区域提供通信覆盖。位于基站的通信覆盖范围内的一个或多个终端,均可以接入基站。In this wireless communication system, the base station can provide communication coverage for a specific geographic area through an integrated or external antenna device. One or more terminals located within the communication coverage area of the base station can access the base station.
应理解,该无线通信系统可以遵从第三代合作伙伴计划(third generation partnership project,3GPP)的无线通信标准,也可以遵从其他无线通信标准,例如电气电子工程师学会(institute of electrical and electronics engineers,IEEE)的802系列(如802.11,802.15,或者802.20)的无线通信标准。图1中虽然仅示出了一个基站和一个终端,该无线通信系统也可包括其他数目的终端和基站。此外,该无线通信系统还可包括其他的网络设备,比如核心网设备。It should be understood that the wireless communication system can comply with the wireless communication standards of the third generation partnership project (3GPP), or other wireless communication standards, such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) ) 802 series (such as 802.11, 802.15, or 802.20) wireless communication standards. Although only one base station and one terminal are shown in FIG. 1, the wireless communication system may also include other numbers of terminals and base stations. In addition, the wireless communication system may also include other network equipment, such as core network equipment.
终端和基站应知晓该无线通信系统预定义的配置,包括系统支持的无线电接入技术(radio access technology,RAT)以及系统规定的无线资源配置等,比如无线电的频段和CC的基本配置。这些系统预定义的配置可作为无线通信系统的标准协议的一部分,或者通过终端和基站间的交互确定。相关标准协议的内容,可能会预先存储在终端和基站的存储器中,或者体现为终端和基站的硬件电路或软件代码。The terminal and base station should know the predefined configuration of the wireless communication system, including the radio access technology (RAT) supported by the system and the radio resource configuration specified by the system, such as the radio frequency band and the basic configuration of the CC. The predefined configuration of these systems can be used as a part of the standard protocol of the wireless communication system, or determined by the interaction between the terminal and the base station. The content of the relevant standard protocol may be pre-stored in the memory of the terminal and the base station, or embodied in the hardware circuit or software code of the terminal and the base station.
其中,CC是符合系统规定的一段频率范围。这段频率范围可由CC的中心频率(记为载频)和CC的带宽共同确定。通过系统预定义的配置,终端可以知晓进行上行数据传输的上行载波集合,从而在该上行载波集合中的一个或多个载波上发送数据;同样地,基站也可以知晓进行下行数据传输的下行载波集合,从而在该下行载波集合中的一个或多个载波上发送数据。Among them, CC is a frequency range that complies with system regulations. This section of frequency range can be jointly determined by the center frequency of the CC (denoted as the carrier frequency) and the bandwidth of the CC. Through the pre-defined configuration of the system, the terminal can know the uplink carrier set for uplink data transmission, so as to transmit data on one or more carriers in the uplink carrier set; similarly, the base station can also know the downlink carrier for downlink data transmission Set, so that data is sent on one or more carriers in the downlink carrier set.
该无线通信系统中,终端和基站可以支持一种RAT(例如5G NR、4G LTE或未来演进系统的RAT),也可以支持多种RAT。终端和基站支持一种RAT的方式可以称为独立部署(standalone,SA);终端和基站支持多种RAT的方式可以称为非独立部署(non-standalone,NSA),或者称为双连接(dual connectivity,DC)。具体地,双连接包括但不限于E-UTRA_NR双连接(E-UTRA NR dual connectivity,EN-DC)、NR_E-UTRA双连接(NR E-UTRA dual connectivity,NE-DC)、NR_NR双连接(NR_NR dual connectivity,NR-NR DC)、LTE-LTE双连接(LTE_LTE dual connectivity,LTE-LTE DC)或者其他的多无线接入技术双连接(multi-RAT dual connectivity,MR-DC)。In the wireless communication system, the terminal and the base station can support one RAT (for example, 5G NR, 4G LTE or the RAT of the future evolution system), and can also support multiple RATs. The way that the terminal and base station support one RAT can be called standalone (standalone, SA); the way that the terminal and base station support multiple RATs can be called non-standalone (NSA), or dual connectivity (dual connectivity). connectivity, DC). Specifically, dual connectivity includes but is not limited to E-UTRA_NR dual connectivity (EN-DC), NR_E-UTRA dual connectivity (NR E-UTRA dual connectivity, NE-DC), NR_NR dual connectivity (NR_NR) dual connectivity, NR-NR DC), LTE-LTE dual connectivity (LTE-LTE dual connectivity, LTE-LTE DC) or other multi-RAT dual connectivity (MR-DC).
特别地,在5G通信系统中,为了解决小区边缘的上行业务信道覆盖比下行业务信道覆盖低约十几个dB的问题,提出了补充上行链路(supplementary uplink,SUL)的概念,用以实现小区边缘的上下行完整覆盖。SUL涉及1.8G/800M/2.1G等频段,为单上行载波。因此,在5G系统中,上行链路包括NR UL和SUL。也就是说,NR小区存在两个上行载波,一个是NR UL载波,另一个是SUL载波。In particular, in the 5G communication system, in order to solve the problem that the coverage of the uplink traffic channel at the cell edge is about a dozen dB lower than the coverage of the downlink traffic channel, a supplementary uplink (SUL) concept is proposed to achieve Complete coverage of uplink and downlink at the edge of the cell. SUL involves frequency bands such as 1.8G/800M/2.1G and is a single uplink carrier. Therefore, in the 5G system, the uplink includes NR UL and SUL. In other words, there are two uplink carriers in the NR cell, one is the NR UL carrier and the other is the SUL carrier.
通过以上介绍不难看出,终端可以通过多个上行链路进行上行数据传输,例如SA时,终端可以通过NR UL和SUL进行上行数据传输;NSA时,终端可以通过NR UL、LTE UL、SUL等进行上行数据传输。那么,系统配置给终端的上行载波集合中可以包括多个频段的CC,例如包括NR UL频段的CC、LTE UL频段的CC以及SUL频段的CC。终端在进行上行数据传输时,可以在上行载波集合的CC中进行载波切换。From the above introduction, it is not difficult to see that the terminal can transmit uplink data through multiple uplinks. For example, in SA, the terminal can transmit uplink data through NR UL and SUL; in NSA, the terminal can transmit through NR UL, LTE UL, SUL, etc. Perform uplink data transmission. Then, the uplink carrier set configured by the system for the terminal may include CCs in multiple frequency bands, for example, including CCs in the NR UL frequency band, CCs in the LTE UL frequency band, and CCs in the SUL frequency band. When the terminal is performing uplink data transmission, it can perform carrier switching in the CC of the uplink carrier set.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中,终端可以在频段内进行载波切换,例如从NR UL的CC1切换到CC2,也可以进行跨频段的载波切换,例如从LTE UL的CC1切换到NR UL的CC2,本申请实施例对这两种切换方式均适用。It should be noted that in this embodiment of the application, the terminal can perform carrier switching within the frequency band, for example, switching from NR UL CC1 to CC2, or cross-band carrier switching, such as switching from LTE UL CC1 to NR UL. CC2, the embodiment of this application is applicable to both switching modes.
具体地,终端的载波切换过程可以如图2所示,终端在接入基站以后,基站可以向终端发送载波配置信息以及载波切换请求,终端基于基站的配置和调度执行载波切换的操作。Specifically, the carrier switching process of the terminal may be as shown in Figure 2. After the terminal accesses the base station, the base station may send carrier configuration information and a carrier switching request to the terminal, and the terminal performs the carrier switching operation based on the configuration and scheduling of the base station.
由于终端的发射通道的数量有限,因而在进行载波切换时,终端需要对发射通道的参数和配置进行调整,以适用于不同CC的发送。对于进行载波切换的两个成员载波CC1和CC2,两个成员载波可能均为单天线发送(例如通过天线1发送CC1,通过天线2发送CC2),可能一个成员载波单天线发送、另一个成员载波多天线发送(例如通过天线1发送CC1,或者通过天线1和天线2同时发送CC2),也可能两个成员载波均为多天线发送(例如通过天线1和天线2同时发送CC1,或者通过天线1和天线2同时发送CC2)。对于上述三种不同方式,终端在进行载波切换时对发射通道的调整方式也有所不同。Since the number of transmission channels of the terminal is limited, when performing carrier switching, the terminal needs to adjust the parameters and configuration of the transmission channel to be suitable for transmission of different CCs. For the two component carriers CC1 and CC2 for carrier switching, both component carriers may be transmitted with a single antenna (for example, CC1 is transmitted through antenna 1 and CC2 is transmitted through antenna 2), or one component carrier may be transmitted with a single antenna and the other component carrier Multi-antenna transmission (for example, sending CC1 through antenna 1, or sending CC2 through antenna 1 and antenna 2 at the same time), it is also possible that both component carriers are multi-antenna transmission (for example, sending CC1 through antenna 1 and antenna 2 at the same time, or sending CC1 through antenna 1 Send CC2 simultaneously with antenna 2). For the above three different methods, the terminal adjusts the transmitting channel in different ways when performing carrier switching.
应理解,由于本申请实施例讨论的是载波切换方案,因而CC1和CC2是在不同时刻发送的,比如终端在CC1上进行上行数据传输,然后基于基站的指示,切换到CC2上进行上行数据传输,或者,终端在CC2上进行上行数据传输,然后基于基站的指示,切换到CC1上进行上行数据传输。It should be understood that because the embodiment of the application discusses the carrier switching scheme, CC1 and CC2 are sent at different times. For example, the terminal performs uplink data transmission on CC1, and then switches to CC2 for uplink data transmission based on the instructions of the base station. Or, the terminal performs uplink data transmission on CC2, and then switches to CC1 for uplink data transmission based on the instruction of the base station.
下面,首先对上述三种方式对应的应用场景的具体示例进行介绍。Below, firstly, specific examples of application scenarios corresponding to the above three methods are introduced.
场景一:CC1和CC2均为单天线发送。Scenario 1: Both CC1 and CC2 are transmitted by a single antenna.
示例性地,采用SA方式、且有SUL时,CC1可以在NR UL(例如3.5G频段)上采用单天线发送上行数据,CC2可以在SUL(例如1.8G频段)上采用单天线发送上行数据,终端可以进行CC1和CC2之间的载波切换。Exemplarily, when the SA method is used and SUL is available, CC1 can use a single antenna to transmit uplink data on NR UL (for example, 3.5G frequency band), and CC2 can use a single antenna to transmit uplink data on SUL (for example, 1.8G frequency band). The terminal can perform carrier switching between CC1 and CC2.
示例性地,采用NSA方式、且有SUL时,由于LTE UL(例如1.8G频段)和SUL(例如1.8G频段)的载波频点和信道带宽参数均相同,因而CC1可以在NR UL(例如3.5G频段)上采用单天线发送上行数据,CC2可以在LTE UL(例如1.8G频段)上采用单天线发送上行数据,终端可以进行CC1和CC2之间的载波切换;或者,CC1可以在NR UL(例如3.5G频段)上采用单天线发送上行数据,CC2可以在SUL(例如1.8G频段)上采用单天线发送上行数据,终端可以进行CC1和CC2之间的载波切换。Exemplarily, when the NSA method is adopted and SUL is available, since the carrier frequency and channel bandwidth parameters of LTE UL (for example, 1.8G frequency band) and SUL (for example, 1.8G frequency band) are the same, CC1 can be used in NR UL (for example, 3.5 G band) uses a single antenna to transmit uplink data, CC2 can use a single antenna to transmit uplink data on LTE UL (for example, 1.8G band), and the terminal can perform carrier switching between CC1 and CC2; or, CC1 can be in NR UL ( For example, a single antenna is used to transmit uplink data on the 3.5G frequency band, and CC2 can use a single antenna to transmit uplink data on the SUL (for example, the 1.8G frequency band), and the terminal can perform carrier switching between CC1 and CC2.
示例性地,采用NSA方式、且无SUL时,若LTE UL和NR UL在半静态功率共享状态,基站允许终端单上行操作(single UL operation,SUO),或者为了避免LTE UL和NR UL 同时发送引入的交调干扰,基站允许终端SUO。此时终端不能同时发送LTE UL和NR UL。那么,CC1可以在LTE UL上采用单天线发送上行数据,或者CC2可以在NR UL上采用单天线发送上行数据,终端可以进行CC1和CC2之间的载波切换。Exemplarily, when the NSA method is adopted and there is no SUL, if LTE UL and NR UL are in the semi-static power sharing state, the base station allows the terminal to allow single UL operation (SUO), or to avoid simultaneous transmission of LTE UL and NR UL With the introduction of intermodulation interference, the base station allows the terminal SUO. At this time, the terminal cannot send LTE UL and NR UL at the same time. Then, CC1 can use a single antenna to transmit uplink data on LTE UL, or CC2 can use a single antenna to transmit uplink data on NR UL, and the terminal can perform carrier switching between CC1 and CC2.
示例性地,半静态功率共享状态是指,在NSA场景下,终端被配置的LTE下的线性功率与NR下的线性功率之和大于终端被配置的NSA下的最大线性功率,此时基站可以指示终端SUO,即终端只能单独发送LTE UL或者单独发送NR UL,不能同时发送LTE UL和NR UL,避免终端的功率超过配置的NSA下的最大线性功率。Exemplarily, the semi-static power sharing state means that in the NSA scenario, the sum of the linear power configured by the terminal under LTE and the linear power under NR is greater than the maximum linear power configured under the NSA for the terminal, and the base station can Instruct the terminal SUO, that is, the terminal can only send LTE UL or NR UL alone, and cannot send LTE UL and NR UL at the same time, so as to prevent the terminal's power from exceeding the maximum linear power configured under the NSA.
示例性地,交调产物是指,在NSA场景下,终端发送的NR UL和LTE UL的交调干扰恰好落在LTE或者NR DL,从而对LTE或者NR DL的接收产生交调干扰,此时基站可以指示终端SUO,避免对LTE或者NR DL的接收灵敏度的干扰。Exemplarily, the intermodulation product refers to that in the NSA scenario, the intermodulation interference of NR UL and LTE UL sent by the terminal happens to fall on LTE or NR DL, thereby causing intermodulation interference to the reception of LTE or NR DL. The base station can instruct the terminal SUO to avoid interference to the receiving sensitivity of LTE or NR DL.
场景二:CC1单天线发送、CC2多天线发送。Scenario 2: CC1 single antenna transmission, CC2 multiple antenna transmission.
示例性地,采用NSA方式、且无SUL时,基站允许终端SUO,此时,CC1可以在LTE UL上采用单天线发送上行数据,CC2可以在NR UL上采用多天线发送上行数据,终端可以进行CC1和CC2之间的载波切换。Exemplarily, when the NSA method is used and there is no SUL, the base station allows the terminal SUO. At this time, CC1 can use a single antenna to transmit uplink data on LTE UL, and CC2 can use multiple antennas to transmit uplink data on NR UL, and the terminal can perform Carrier switching between CC1 and CC2.
示例性地,采用SA方式、且有SUL时,在小区中心,CC1可以在SUL上采用单天线发送上行数据,CC2可以在NR UL上采用多天线发送上行数据,终端可以进行CC1和CC2之间的载波切换,利用额外增加的SUL载波增加上行频谱资源,提高上行数据吞吐量;或者,在小区边缘,CC1可以在SUL上采用单天线发送上行数据,CC2可以在NR UL上采用多天线分别发送探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS),终端可以进行CC1和CC2之间的载波切换,利用SUL载波克服NR UL在小区边缘的覆盖缺陷。Exemplarily, when SA mode is used and SUL is available, in the cell center, CC1 can use a single antenna to send uplink data on SUL, CC2 can use multiple antennas to send uplink data on NR UL, and the terminal can perform between CC1 and CC2. For carrier switching, use additional SUL carriers to increase uplink spectrum resources and improve uplink data throughput; or, at the cell edge, CC1 can use a single antenna to transmit uplink data on SUL, and CC2 can use multiple antennas to transmit on NR UL. With sounding reference signal (SRS), the terminal can perform carrier switching between CC1 and CC2, and use the SUL carrier to overcome the coverage defect of NR UL at the cell edge.
示例性地,采用NSA方式、且有SUL时,基站允许终端SUO,CC1可以在LTE UL上采用单天线发送上行数据,CC2可以在NR UL上采用多天线发送上行数据,此时SUL不发送上行,终端可以进行CC1和CC2之间的载波切换。Exemplarily, when the NSA method is used and SUL is available, the base station allows the terminal SUO, CC1 can use a single antenna to transmit uplink data on LTE UL, and CC2 can use multiple antennas to transmit uplink data on NR UL. At this time, SUL does not transmit uplink data. , The terminal can perform carrier switching between CC1 and CC2.
场景三:CC1和CC2均为多天线发送。Scenario 3: Both CC1 and CC2 are multi-antenna transmission.
示例性地,采用NSA方式、且无SUL时,基站允许终端SUO,此时,CC1可以在LTE UL上采用多天线发送上行数据,CC2可以在NR UL上采用多天线发送上行数据,终端可以进行CC1和CC2之间的载波切换。Exemplarily, when the NSA method is used and there is no SUL, the base station allows the terminal SUO. At this time, CC1 can use multiple antennas to transmit uplink data on LTE UL, and CC2 can use multiple antennas to transmit uplink data on NR UL, and the terminal can perform Carrier switching between CC1 and CC2.
示例性地,采用NSA方式、且有SUL时,基站允许终端SUO,CC1可以在LTE UL上采用多天线发送上行数据,CC2可以在NR UL上采用多天线发送上行数据,此时SUL不发送上行,终端可以进行CC1和CC2之间的载波切换。Exemplarily, when the NSA method is used and SUL is available, the base station allows the terminal SUO, CC1 can use multiple antennas to transmit uplink data on LTE UL, and CC2 can use multiple antennas to transmit uplink data on NR UL. At this time, SUL does not transmit uplink data. , The terminal can perform carrier switching between CC1 and CC2.
应理解,上述应用场景仅为示例,实际应用中,终端在CC1或CC2上进行上行数据传输时,采用单天线发送还是双天线发送可以根据应用需求和终端能力进行配置。此外,在上述应用场景的示例中,均以CC1和CC2跨频段切换为例进行示意,实际应用中,CC1和CC2也可以位于同一频段内。无论CC1和CC2位于同一频段还是不同频段,均可以采用本申请实施例提供的载波切换方案。It should be understood that the above application scenarios are only examples. In actual applications, when the terminal performs uplink data transmission on CC1 or CC2, whether to use single antenna transmission or dual antenna transmission can be configured according to application requirements and terminal capabilities. In addition, in the above examples of application scenarios, the cross-band switching of CC1 and CC2 is taken as an example for illustration. In actual applications, CC1 and CC2 may also be located in the same frequency band. Regardless of whether CC1 and CC2 are located in the same frequency band or in different frequency bands, the carrier switching scheme provided in the embodiment of the present application can be used.
为了说明上述三种场景下终端进行载波切换时对发射通道的调整方式,下面,首先对终端的具体结构进行介绍。In order to explain how the terminal adjusts the transmission channel when performing carrier switching in the above three scenarios, the following first introduces the specific structure of the terminal.
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种终端的结构示意图。如图3所示,该终端可包括应用子系统、内存(memory)、大容量存储器(massive storge)、基带子系统、射频集成电路(radio  frequency intergreted circuit,RFIC)、射频前端(radio frequency front end,RFFE)器件以及天线(antenna,ANT),这些器件可以通过各种互联总线或其他连接方式耦合。FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal provided by an embodiment of the application. As shown in Figure 3, the terminal can include application subsystems, memory, mass storage, baseband subsystems, radio frequency intergreted circuit (RFIC), and radio frequency front end. , RFFE) devices and antennas (antenna, ANT), these devices can be coupled through various interconnection buses or other connection methods.
图3中,ANT_1表示第一天线,ANT_N表示第N天线,N为大于1的正整数。Tx表示发送路径,Rx表示接收路径,不同的数字表示不同的路径。FBRx表示反馈接收路径,PRx表示主接收路径,DRx表示分集接收路径。HB表示高频,LB表示低频,两者是指频率的相对高低。BB表示基带。应理解,图3中的标记和组件仅为示意目的,仅作为一种可能的实现方式,本申请实施例还包括其他的实现方式。In FIG. 3, ANT_1 represents the first antenna, ANT_N represents the Nth antenna, and N is a positive integer greater than 1. Tx represents the transmission path, Rx represents the reception path, and different numbers represent different paths. FBRx represents the feedback receiving path, PRx represents the main receiving path, and DRx represents the diversity receiving path. HB stands for high frequency and LB stands for low frequency. Both refer to the relative high and low of the frequency. BB stands for baseband. It should be understood that the marks and components in FIG. 3 are for illustrative purposes only, and are only used as a possible implementation manner, and the embodiments of the present application also include other implementation manners.
其中,应用子系统可作为终端的主控制系统或主计算系统,用于运行主操作系统和应用程序,管理整个终端的软硬件资源,并可为用户提供用户操作界面。Among them, the application subsystem can be used as the main control system or main computing system of the terminal to run the main operating system and application programs, manage the software and hardware resources of the entire terminal, and provide users with a user operation interface.
图3中,RFFE器件和RFIC 1(以及可选的RFIC 2)可以共同组成射频子系统。射频子系统可以进一步分为射频接收通道(RF receive path)和射频发射通道(RF transmit path)。射频接收通道可通过天线接收射频信号,对该射频信号进行处理(如放大、滤波和下变频)以得到基带信号,并传递给基带子系统。射频发射通道可接收来自基带子系统的基带信号,对基带信号进行射频处理(如上变频、放大和滤波)以得到射频信号,并最终通过天线将该射频信号辐射到空间中。具体地,射频子系统可包括天线开关,天线调谐器,低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier,LNA),功率放大器(power amplifier,PA),混频器(mixer),本地振荡器(local oscillator,LO)、滤波器(filter)等电子器件,这些电子器件可以根据需要集成到一个或多个芯片中。天线有时也可以认为是射频子系统的一部分。In Figure 3, the RFFE device and RFIC 1 (and optional RFIC 2) can jointly form a radio frequency subsystem. The radio frequency subsystem can be further divided into radio frequency receiving channel (RF receive path) and radio frequency transmitting channel (RF transmit path). The radio frequency receiving channel can receive the radio frequency signal through the antenna, and process the radio frequency signal (such as amplifying, filtering and down-converting) to obtain the baseband signal, and pass it to the baseband subsystem. The radio frequency transmitting channel can receive the baseband signal from the baseband subsystem, perform radio frequency processing (such as up-conversion, amplification and filtering) on the baseband signal to obtain the radio frequency signal, and finally radiate the radio frequency signal into the space through the antenna. Specifically, the radio frequency subsystem may include an antenna switch, an antenna tuner, a low noise amplifier (LNA), a power amplifier (PA), a mixer (mixer), and a local oscillator (LO). ), filters and other electronic devices, which can be integrated into one or more chips as needed. The antenna can sometimes be considered part of the radio frequency subsystem.
基带子系统可以从基带信号中提取有用的信息或数据比特,或者将信息或数据比特转换为待发送的基带信号。这些信息或数据比特可以是表示语音、文本、视频等用户数据或控制信息的数据。The baseband subsystem can extract useful information or data bits from the baseband signal, or convert the information or data bits into a baseband signal to be sent. These information or data bits can be data representing user data or control information such as voice, text, and video.
此外,由于射频信号是模拟信号,基带子系统处理的信号主要是数字信号,终端中还需要有模数转换器件。模数转换器件包括将模拟信号转换为数字信号的模数转换器(analog to digital converter,ADC),以及将数字信号转换为模拟信号的数模转换器(digital to analog converter,DAC)。本申请实施例中,模数转换器件可以设置在基带子系统中,也可以设置在射频子系统中。In addition, since the radio frequency signal is an analog signal, the signal processed by the baseband subsystem is mainly a digital signal, and an analog-to-digital conversion device is also required in the terminal. The analog-to-digital conversion device includes an analog-to-digital converter (ADC) that converts an analog signal into a digital signal, and a digital-to-analog converter (DAC) that converts a digital signal into an analog signal. In the embodiment of the present application, the analog-to-digital conversion device may be arranged in the baseband subsystem or the radio frequency subsystem.
存储器可分为易失性存储器(volatile memory)和非易失性存储器(non-volatile memory,NVM)。易失性存储器是指当电源供应中断后,内部存放的数据便会丢失的存储器。目前,易失性存储器主要是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),包括静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)和动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)。非易失性存储器是指即使电源供应中断,内部存放的数据也不会因此丢失的存储器。常见的非易失性存储器包括只读存储器(read only memory,ROM)、光盘、磁盘以及基于闪存(flash memory)技术的各种存储器等。通常来说,内存可以选用易失性存储器,大容量存储器可以选用非易失性存储器,例如磁盘或闪存。Memory can be divided into volatile memory (volatile memory) and non-volatile memory (non-volatile memory, NVM). Volatile memory refers to the memory in which the data stored inside will be lost when the power supply is interrupted. At present, volatile memory is mainly random access memory (RAM), including static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM) and dynamic random access memory (dynamic RAM, DRAM). Non-volatile memory refers to the memory in which the data stored inside will not be lost even if the power supply is interrupted. Common non-volatile memories include read only memory (ROM), optical discs, magnetic disks, and various memories based on flash memory (flash memory) technology. Generally speaking, volatile memory can be selected for memory, and non-volatile memory, such as magnetic disk or flash memory, can be selected for mass storage.
本申请实施例中,基带子系统和射频子系统共同组成通信子系统,为终端提供无线通信功能。通常,基带子系统负责管理通信子系统的软硬件资源,并且可以配置射频子系统的工作参数。基带子系统的一个或多个处理核心可以集成为一个或多个芯片,该芯片可称为基带处理芯片或基带芯片。类似地,RFIC可以被称为射频处理芯片或射频芯片。此外,随着技术的演进,通信子系统中射频子系统和基带子系统的功能划分也可以有所调整。例如,将部分射频子系统的功能集成到基带子系统中,或者将部分基带子系统的功能集成到 射频子系统中。In the embodiments of the present application, the baseband subsystem and the radio frequency subsystem jointly constitute a communication subsystem, which provides wireless communication functions for the terminal. Generally, the baseband subsystem is responsible for managing the software and hardware resources of the communication subsystem, and can configure the working parameters of the radio frequency subsystem. One or more processing cores of the baseband subsystem may be integrated into one or more chips, which may be referred to as a baseband processing chip or a baseband chip. Similarly, RFIC can be called a radio frequency processing chip or a radio frequency chip. In addition, with the evolution of technology, the functional division of the radio frequency subsystem and the baseband subsystem in the communication subsystem can also be adjusted. For example, integrating some of the functions of the radio frequency subsystem into the baseband subsystem, or integrating some of the functions of the baseband subsystem into the radio frequency subsystem.
图4为本申请实施例提供的另一种终端的结构示意图。图4示出了终端中用于射频信号处理的一些常见器件。应理解,图4中虽然只示出了两条射频接收通道和两条射频发射通道,但本申请实施例中的终端不限于此。FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of another terminal provided by an embodiment of the application. Figure 4 shows some common devices used for radio frequency signal processing in a terminal. It should be understood that although only two radio frequency receiving channels and two radio frequency transmitting channels are shown in FIG. 4, the terminal in the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
对于射频接收通道而言,从天线处接收的射频信号经过天线开关的选择,送入射频接收通道。由于从天线接收的射频信号通常很微弱,通常采用LNA放大。放大后的信号先经过混频器的下变频处理,再经过滤波器和ADC,最终完成射频信号处理。对于射频发射通道而言,基带信号可经过DAC变为模拟信号,该模拟信号经过混频器的上变频处理变为射频信号,该射频信号经过滤波器和PA的处理,最终经过天线开关的选择,从合适的天线向外辐射。For the RF receiving channel, the RF signal received from the antenna is selected by the antenna switch and sent to the RF receiving channel. Since the radio frequency signal received from the antenna is usually very weak, it is usually amplified by LNA. The amplified signal first undergoes the down-conversion processing of the mixer, and then the filter and ADC, and finally completes the radio frequency signal processing. For the radio frequency transmission channel, the baseband signal can be converted into an analog signal through a DAC. The analog signal is converted into a radio frequency signal through the up-conversion processing of the mixer. The radio frequency signal is processed by a filter and a PA, and finally selected by an antenna switch , Radiate outward from a suitable antenna.
其中,在混频器中,输入信号和本地振荡器输出的本振信号进行混频,可以实现上变频(对应射频发射通道)或下变频(对应射频接收通道)操作。其中,本地振荡器是射频领域的常用术语,通常简称本振。本振有时也被称为频率合成器或频率综合器(frequency synthesizer),简称频综。本振或频综的主要作用是为射频处理提供所需要的特定频率,例如载波的频点。较高的频率可以采用锁相环(phase locked loop,PLL)或延迟锁定环(delay locked loop,DLL)等器件实现。较低的频率可以采用直接采用晶体振荡器,或者对PLL等器件产生的高频信号进行分频实现。Among them, in the mixer, the input signal and the local oscillator signal output by the local oscillator are mixed to achieve up-conversion (corresponding to the radio frequency transmitting channel) or down-conversion (corresponding to the radio frequency receiving channel) operation. Among them, the local oscillator is a common term in the radio frequency field, usually referred to as local oscillator. The local oscillator is sometimes called a frequency synthesizer or frequency synthesizer, or frequency synthesizer for short. The main function of the local oscillator or frequency synthesizer is to provide the specific frequency required for radio frequency processing, such as the frequency of the carrier. Higher frequencies can be implemented by using devices such as phase locked loop (PLL) or delay locked loop (DLL). The lower frequency can be achieved by directly using a crystal oscillator, or by dividing the high frequency signal generated by a device such as a PLL.
对于前述上行载波切换操作而言,CC1和CC2均可以采用单天线发送或多天线发送。例如,在场景一中,CC1可以在图4所示的射频发射通道1上发送,CC2可以在图4所示的射频发射通道2上发送;在场景二中,CC1可以在图4所示的射频发射通道1上发送,CC2可以在图4所示的射频发射通道1和射频发射通道2上发送;在场景三中,CC1可以在图4所示的射频发射通道1和射频发射通道2上发送,CC2可以在图4所示的射频发射通道1和射频发射通道2上发送。For the foregoing uplink carrier switching operation, both CC1 and CC2 can adopt single antenna transmission or multi-antenna transmission. For example, in scenario 1, CC1 can be transmitted on radio frequency transmission channel 1 shown in Figure 4, and CC2 can be transmitted on radio frequency transmission channel 2 shown in Figure 4; in scenario 2, CC1 can be transmitted on radio frequency transmission channel 2 shown in Figure 4 Send on RF transmission channel 1, CC2 can be sent on RF transmission channel 1 and RF transmission channel 2 shown in Figure 4; in scenario 3, CC1 can be sent on RF transmission channel 1 and RF transmission channel 2 shown in Figure 4 Send, CC2 can be sent on the radio frequency transmitting channel 1 and the radio frequency transmitting channel 2 shown in FIG. 4.
不难看出,在场景二中,射频发射通道2既用于发送CC1又用于发送CC2,因而在进行CC1和CC2间的载波切换时,需要对射频发射通道2的参数进行调整;在场景三中,射频发射通道1和射频发射通道2既用于发送CC1又用于发送CC2,因而在进行CC1和CC2间的载波切换时,需要对射频发射通道1和射频发射通道2的参数进行调整。It is not difficult to see that in scenario 2, RF transmission channel 2 is used to send both CC1 and CC2. Therefore, when switching the carrier between CC1 and CC2, the parameters of RF transmission channel 2 need to be adjusted; in scenario 3 In the RF transmission channel 1 and the RF transmission channel 2 are used to send both CC1 and CC2. Therefore, when the carrier switching between CC1 and CC2 is performed, the parameters of the RF transmission channel 1 and the RF transmission channel 2 need to be adjusted.
具体地,在对射频发射通道的参数进行调整时,需要调整多种器件的配置参数,例如,天线开关的配置参数、本振的配置参数、PA的配置参数等。其中,进行参数调整后,本振需要一定的时间(例如130us~140us)才可以达到稳定工作状态,输出稳定的本振信号。因此,在进行载波切换时,尤其是在前述场景二和场景三下进行载波切换时,因为载波之间存在射频通道的复用,并且因为等待本振的稳定需要时间,所以引入较长的载波切换时间,期间数据业务存在中断,影响上行数据吞吐量和下行数据的HARQ-ACK反馈时延,难以满足快速切换的业务需求。Specifically, when adjusting the parameters of the radio frequency transmission channel, it is necessary to adjust the configuration parameters of various devices, for example, the configuration parameters of the antenna switch, the configuration parameters of the local oscillator, and the configuration parameters of the PA. Among them, after adjusting the parameters, the local oscillator needs a certain time (for example, 130 us to 140 us) to reach a stable working state and output a stable local oscillator signal. Therefore, when performing carrier switching, especially when performing carrier switching in the aforementioned scenario 2 and scenario 3, because there is multiplexing of radio frequency channels between the carriers, and because it takes time to wait for the local oscillator to stabilize, a longer carrier is introduced. During the handover time, the data service is interrupted, which affects the uplink data throughput and the HARQ-ACK feedback delay of the downlink data, and it is difficult to meet the service requirements of fast handover.
本申请实施例提供一种无线通信装置及载波切换方法,用以在进行载波切换时减少数据业务中断时间。The embodiments of the present application provide a wireless communication device and a carrier switching method to reduce the interruption time of data services when performing carrier switching.
参见图5,为本申请实施例提供的一种无线通信装置。其中,无线通信装置500包括多个发射通道,多个发射通道中的第一发射通道501用于在第一时间段内在第一成员载波 上发送数据,多个发射通道中的第二发射通道502也用于在第一时间段内在第一成员载波上发送数据,此外,第二发射通道502还用于在第二时间段内在第二成员载波上发送数据。此外,无线通信装置500中还包括第一本振503和第二本振504。Referring to FIG. 5, a wireless communication device provided by an embodiment of this application. Wherein, the wireless communication device 500 includes multiple transmission channels, the first transmission channel 501 of the multiple transmission channels is used to transmit data on the first component carrier in the first time period, and the second transmission channel 502 of the multiple transmission channels It is also used to send data on the first component carrier in the first time period. In addition, the second transmission channel 502 is also used to send data on the second component carrier in the second time period. In addition, the wireless communication device 500 also includes a first local oscillator 503 and a second local oscillator 504.
第一本振503,用于选择性地在第一时间段内为第一发射通道501中的第一混频器以及第二发射通道502中的第二混频器提供第一本振信号。The first local oscillator 503 is used to selectively provide a first local oscillator signal for the first mixer in the first transmission channel 501 and the second mixer in the second transmission channel 502 in the first time period.
第二本振504,用于选择性地在第二时间段内为第二混频器提供第二本振信号。The second local oscillator 504 is used to selectively provide a second local oscillator signal for the second mixer in the second time period.
其中,多个发射通道、第一本振503和第二本振504可以集成在第一集成电路芯片中,例如可以集成在RFIC中。Among them, the multiple transmission channels, the first local oscillator 503 and the second local oscillator 504 may be integrated in a first integrated circuit chip, for example, may be integrated in an RFIC.
不难看出,在无线通信装置500中,第一成员载波采用多天线(双天线)发送,第二成员载波采用单天线发送。即,在第一时间段,第一成员载波在第一发射通道501和第二发射通道502上发送;在第二时间段,第二成员载波在第二发射通道502上发送。也就是说,图5所示的无线通信装置500适用于前述场景二下的载波切换。在该场景下,第二发射通道502是时分复用的。其中,第一时间段可以晚于第二时间段,也可以早于第二时间段。It is not difficult to see that in the wireless communication device 500, the first component carrier is transmitted using multiple antennas (dual antennas), and the second component carrier is transmitted using a single antenna. That is, in the first time period, the first component carrier is transmitted on the first transmission channel 501 and the second transmission channel 502; in the second time period, the second component carrier is transmitted on the second transmission channel 502. In other words, the wireless communication device 500 shown in FIG. 5 is suitable for carrier switching in the second scenario described above. In this scenario, the second transmission channel 502 is time-division multiplexed. Among them, the first time period may be later than the second time period or may be earlier than the second time period.
以下是对上述无线通信装置的四点说明。The following is a four-point description of the above-mentioned wireless communication device.
1、无线通信装置500中,每个发射通道对应一个天线单元,若某个成员载波在同一时间段通过两个发射通道发送,则表示该成员载波在这一时间段内采用双天线发送。若某个成员载波在一个时间段内通过一个发射通道发送,则表示该成员载波在这一时间段内采用单天线发送。1. In the wireless communication device 500, each transmission channel corresponds to an antenna unit. If a component carrier is transmitted through two transmission channels in the same time period, it means that the component carrier is transmitted by dual antennas in this time period. If a component carrier is transmitted through a transmission channel in a time period, it means that the component carrier is transmitted by a single antenna in this time period.
2、无线通信装置500中的发射通道可以视为图4所示终端中的射频发射通道,用于对基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线单元发送出去;无线通信装置500中的发射通道也可以视为图4所示终端中的基带信号处理部分与射频发射通道的集合,用于将信息或数据比特转换为待发送的基带信号、并对基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线单元发送出去。此外,应理解,本申请实施例中的发射通道所述包含的器件并不限定为图4所示的方案,本申请实施例中仅限定发射通道具备上述功能,对发射通道的具体结构不做限定。2. The transmission channel in the wireless communication device 500 can be regarded as the radio frequency transmission channel in the terminal shown in FIG. 4, which is used to transmit the radio frequency signal through the antenna unit after performing radio frequency processing on the baseband signal; the transmission channel in the wireless communication device 500 It can also be regarded as a collection of the baseband signal processing part and the radio frequency transmission channel in the terminal shown in Figure 4, which is used to convert information or data bits into baseband signals to be sent, and perform radio frequency processing on the baseband signals and pass the radio frequency signals through the antenna. The unit is sent out. In addition, it should be understood that the devices included in the emission channel in the embodiment of this application are not limited to the solution shown in FIG. limited.
3、无线通信装置500中包含多个(至少两个)发射通道,即,除了第一发射通道501和第二发射通道502之外,无线通信装置500还可以包括其他发射通道,本申请中对其他发射通道的用途不做限定。例如,无线通信装置500中还可以包括第三发射通道,该第三发射通道用于在第一时间段内在第一成员载波上发送数据。那么,第一本振503也可以选择性地在第一时间段内为第三发射通道中的第三混频器提供第一本振信号。由于多个射频发射通道中除第一发射通道501和第二发射通道502之外的其他发射通道的用途或与第一发射通道501类似或与第二发射通道502类似,因而本申请中重点关注第一发射通道501和第二发射通道502上的数据发送。3. The wireless communication device 500 includes multiple (at least two) transmission channels, that is, in addition to the first transmission channel 501 and the second transmission channel 502, the wireless communication device 500 may also include other transmission channels. The use of other transmission channels is not limited. For example, the wireless communication device 500 may further include a third transmission channel, which is used to transmit data on the first component carrier in the first time period. Then, the first local oscillator 503 can also selectively provide the first local oscillator signal for the third mixer in the third transmitting channel in the first time period. Since the uses of the other transmission channels except the first transmission channel 501 and the second transmission channel 502 among the multiple radio frequency transmission channels are similar to the first transmission channel 501 or the second transmission channel 502, the focus of this application is Data transmission on the first transmission channel 501 and the second transmission channel 502.
4、在本申请实施例的描述中,将本振视为独立于发射通道的组成部分,这样的目的是体现第一本振503和第二本振504分时提供第一本振信号和第二本振信号。由于第二发射通道502既需要第一本振503提供第一本振信号,又需要第二本振504提供第二本振信号,因而本申请实施例中并未限定第一本振503和第二本振504归属于某个发射通道。应该理解的是,这样划分的目的仅为了示意本申请的方案,若采用其他的表述方式,也可以将第一本振503和第二本振504视为发射通道的组成部分。例如,可以将第一本振503视 为第一发射通道501的组成部分,将第二本振504视为第二发射通道502的组成部分。4. In the description of the embodiments of this application, the local oscillator is regarded as a component independent of the transmitting channel. The purpose of this is to reflect that the first local oscillator 503 and the second local oscillator 504 provide the first local oscillator signal and the second local oscillator in a time-sharing manner. Two local oscillator signal. Since the second transmission channel 502 requires both the first local oscillator 503 to provide the first local oscillator signal and the second local oscillator 504 to provide the second local oscillator signal, the first local oscillator 503 and the second local oscillator 503 are not limited in the embodiment of this application. The second local oscillator 504 belongs to a certain transmitting channel. It should be understood that the purpose of such division is only to illustrate the solution of the present application. If other expressions are adopted, the first local oscillator 503 and the second local oscillator 504 can also be regarded as components of the transmitting channel. For example, the first local oscillator 503 can be regarded as a component of the first emission channel 501, and the second local oscillator 504 can be regarded as a component of the second emission channel 502.
采用无线通信装置500,由于第一成员载波在第一时间段内通过第一发射通道501和第二发射通道502发送,因而第一本振503选择性地在第一时间段内为第一混频器和第二混频器提供第一本振信号,可以实现第一混频器和第二混频根据第一本振信号进行混频,从而实现第一成员载波的发送;同样地,由于第二成员载波在第二时间段内通过第二发射通道502发送,因而第二本振504选择性地在第二时间段内为第二混频器提供第二本振信号,可以实现第二混频器根据第二本振信号进行混频,从而实现第二成员载波的发送。With the wireless communication device 500, since the first component carrier is transmitted through the first transmission channel 501 and the second transmission channel 502 in the first time period, the first local oscillator 503 is selectively the first mixed carrier in the first time period. The frequency converter and the second mixer provide the first local oscillator signal, which can realize the mixing of the first mixer and the second mixer according to the first local oscillator signal, thereby realizing the transmission of the first component carrier; similarly, because The second component carrier is sent through the second transmit channel 502 in the second time period, so the second local oscillator 504 selectively provides the second local oscillator signal for the second mixer in the second time period, which can realize the second The mixer performs mixing according to the second local oscillator signal, thereby realizing the transmission of the second component carrier.
由于通过第一本振503和第二本振504选择性地提供本振信号,因而在进行载波切换时可以根据第一本振信号的生效时间的需求选择性地使能第一本振503输出第一本振信号,或者根据第二本振信号的生效时间的需求选择性地使能第二本振504输出第二本振信号,从而缩短中断时间。以第一时间段早于第二时间段(即从第一成员载波切换到第二成员载波)为例,在第一时间段内,第一本振503输出第一本振信号;在第一本振503为第一混频器和第二混频器提供第一本振信号的同时(即发送第一成员载波的同时),可以选择性地提前启动第二本振504,但并不将第二本振504的输出提供给第二混频器;在第一成员载波发送完成以后,可以选择性地使能第二本振504生效(即将第二本振504的输出提供给第二混频器),此时第二本振504仅需较短的时间即能达到稳定状态,稳定地输出第二本振信号,从而在第二时间段内在第二成员载波上发送数据。也就是说,第一时间段和第二时间段的间隔时间较短,因而在进行载波切换时的业务中断时间较短,从而减小载波切换对上行数据吞吐量和下行反馈时延的影响。Since the local oscillator signal is selectively provided by the first local oscillator 503 and the second local oscillator 504, the output of the first local oscillator 503 can be selectively enabled according to the requirements of the effective time of the first local oscillator signal during carrier switching. The first local oscillator signal or the second local oscillator 504 is selectively enabled to output the second local oscillator signal according to the requirements of the effective time of the second local oscillator signal, thereby shortening the interruption time. Taking the first time period earlier than the second time period (ie switching from the first component carrier to the second component carrier) as an example, in the first time period, the first local oscillator 503 outputs the first local oscillator signal; While the local oscillator 503 provides the first local oscillator signal for the first mixer and the second mixer (that is, while transmitting the first component carrier), the second local oscillator 504 can be selectively activated in advance, but the The output of the second local oscillator 504 is provided to the second mixer; after the transmission of the first component carrier is completed, the second local oscillator 504 can be selectively enabled (that is, the output of the second local oscillator 504 is provided to the second mixer). Frequency converter), at this time, the second local oscillator 504 can reach a stable state in a short time, and output the second local oscillator signal stably, so as to send data on the second component carrier in the second time period. That is to say, the interval between the first time period and the second time period is short, so the service interruption time during carrier switching is short, thereby reducing the impact of carrier switching on uplink data throughput and downlink feedback delay.
具体地,第一本振503和第二本振504选择性地提供第一本振信号和第二本振信号可以通过如下方式实现:第一本振503通过第一开关单元与第一混频器耦合、通过第二开关单元与第二混频器耦合;第二本振504通过第三开关单元与第二混频器耦合。在第一时间段内,第一开关单元和第二开关单元处于闭合状态,第三开关单元处于断开状态;在第二时间段内,第一开关单元和第二开关单元处于断开状态,第三开关单元处于闭合状态。具体地,该无线通信装置500可以如图6所示。Specifically, the first local oscillator 503 and the second local oscillator 504 selectively provide the first local oscillator signal and the second local oscillator signal can be achieved in the following manner: the first local oscillator 503 is mixed with the first through the first switch unit The second local oscillator 504 is coupled to the second mixer through the second switch unit; the second local oscillator 504 is coupled to the second mixer through the third switch unit. In the first time period, the first switch unit and the second switch unit are in the closed state, and the third switch unit is in the off state; in the second time period, the first switch unit and the second switch unit are in the off state, The third switch unit is in a closed state. Specifically, the wireless communication device 500 may be as shown in FIG. 6.
采用上述方案,可以通过第一开关单元、第二开关单元和第三开关单元的切换来实现选择性地为第一混频器提供第一本振信号以及为第二混频器提供第一本振信号和第二本振信号。With the above solution, the first switch unit, the second switch unit, and the third switch unit can be switched to selectively provide the first local oscillator signal for the first mixer and provide the first local oscillator for the second mixer. Oscillation signal and second local oscillation signal.
在第一时间段内,第一发射通道501和第二发射通道502在第一成员载波上发送数据,此时可以将第一开关单元和第二开关单元闭合、将第三开关单元断开,因而第一本振503与第一混频器和第二混频器均耦合,第一本振503输出的第一本振信号可以提供给第一混频器和第二混频器;同时,由于第三开关单元断开,因而第二本振信号并未提供给第二混频器,第二本振信号不会对第二发射通道502上第一成员载波的发送产生影响。In the first time period, the first transmission channel 501 and the second transmission channel 502 send data on the first component carrier. At this time, the first switch unit and the second switch unit can be closed, and the third switch unit can be disconnected. Therefore, the first local oscillator 503 is coupled with the first mixer and the second mixer, and the first local oscillator signal output by the first local oscillator 503 can be provided to the first mixer and the second mixer; at the same time, Since the third switch unit is turned off, the second local oscillator signal is not provided to the second mixer, and the second local oscillator signal will not affect the transmission of the first component carrier on the second transmission channel 502.
在第二时间段内,第二发射通道502在第二成员载波上发送数据,此时可以将第一开关单元和第二开关单元断开、将第三开关单元闭合,因而第二本振504与第二混频器耦合,第二本振504输出的第二本振信号可以提供给第二混频器;同时,由于第一开关单元和第二开关单元断开,因而第一本振信号并未提供给第二混频器,第一本振信号不会对第二发射通道502上第二成员载波的发送产生影响。In the second time period, the second transmission channel 502 transmits data on the second component carrier. At this time, the first switch unit and the second switch unit can be disconnected, and the third switch unit can be closed, so the second local oscillator 504 Coupled with the second mixer, the second local oscillator signal output by the second local oscillator 504 can be provided to the second mixer; at the same time, since the first switch unit and the second switch unit are disconnected, the first local oscillator signal It is not provided to the second mixer, and the first local oscillator signal will not affect the transmission of the second component carrier on the second transmission channel 502.
此外,无线通信装置500中还可以包括控制器,该控制器可以根据业务需求对上述第一开关单元、第二开关单元和第三开关单元的通断进行控制。In addition, the wireless communication device 500 may further include a controller, which may control the on-off of the first switch unit, the second switch unit, and the third switch unit according to service requirements.
控制器的控制逻辑与第一时间段和第二时间段的时间顺序相关,下面分别介绍第一时间段晚于第二时间段以及第一时间段早于第二时间段这两种情况下控制器具体执行的操作。The control logic of the controller is related to the time sequence of the first time period and the second time period. The following describes the control when the first time period is later than the second time period and the first time period is earlier than the second time period. Specific operations performed by the device.
一、第一时间段晚于第二时间段。1. The first time period is later than the second time period.
具体地,在第一时间段晚于第二时间段的情况下,该控制器用于控制第三开关单元在第二时间段的结束时刻从闭合状态变为断开状态,控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元在第一时间段的开始时刻从断开状态变为闭合状态。Specifically, when the first time period is later than the second time period, the controller is used to control the third switch unit to change from the closed state to the open state at the end of the second time period, and control the first switch unit and The second switch unit changes from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the first time period.
第一时间段晚于第二时间段,即先通过第二成员载波在第二发射通道502上发送数据,然后通过第一成员载波在第一发射通道501和第二发射通道502上发送数据,即从第二成员载波切换到第一成员载波。在这种情况下,在第二时间段的结束时刻第二成员载波已发送完毕,因而此时控制器可以控制第三开关单元从闭合状态变为断开状态,停止第二成员载波的发送;在第一时间段的开始时刻需要开始发送第一成员载波,因而此时控制器可以控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元从断开状态变为闭合状态,开始第一成员载波的发送。The first time period is later than the second time period, that is, data is first sent on the second transmission channel 502 through the second component carrier, and then data is sent on the first transmission channel 501 and the second transmission channel 502 through the first component carrier, That is, switching from the second component carrier to the first component carrier. In this case, at the end of the second time period, the second component carrier has been transmitted, so at this time the controller can control the third switch unit to change from the closed state to the open state, and stop the transmission of the second component carrier; At the beginning of the first time period, it is necessary to start sending the first component carrier. Therefore, at this time, the controller can control the first switching unit and the second switching unit to change from the open state to the closed state, and start sending the first component carrier.
进一步地,控制器还可以在第二时间段的结束时刻到来之前,向第一本振503发送第一控制信号,第一控制信号用于指示第一本振503配置第一工作参数,第一工作参数适用于第一成员载波。Further, the controller may also send a first control signal to the first local oscillator 503 before the end of the second time period arrives. The first control signal is used to instruct the first local oscillator 503 to configure the first working parameter. The working parameters are applicable to the first component carrier.
具体地,第一工作参数可以用于配置第一本振503输出的本振信号的频率。由于在第一时间段到来之前的时间段,第一本振503可能用于提供与第一本振信号的频率不同的本振信号,因而在切换到第一成员载波之前,需要对第一本振503的工作参数进行配置。Specifically, the first working parameter may be used to configure the frequency of the local oscillator signal output by the first local oscillator 503. Because in the time period before the arrival of the first time period, the first local oscillator 503 may be used to provide a local oscillator signal with a frequency different from that of the first local oscillator signal. Therefore, before switching to the first component carrier, the first local oscillator 503 The operating parameters of the vibration 503 are configured.
关于上述配置第一工作参数的时机可以有如下理解:在从第二成员载波切换到第一成员载波的情况下,由于将第一工作参数配置到第一本振503之后,第一本振503需要一定时间(130us~140us)才能稳定输出第一本振信号,因而在本申请中,可以在第二成员载波的发送过程中提前启动第一本振503,即在第二时间段的结束时刻开始之前即配置第一本振503的第一工作参数,使得第一本振503可以提前启动。因此,在第二时间段的结束时刻,第一本振503已经配置第一工作参数,第一本振503无需再等待130us~140us即可达到稳定,从而缩短第二时间段和第一时间段之间的中断时间。示例性地,采用本申请提供的方案,第二时间段和第一时间段之间的中断时间可以是0us~几十us。Regarding the above-mentioned timing of configuring the first operating parameter, it can be understood as follows: in the case of switching from the second component carrier to the first component carrier, since the first operating parameter is configured to the first local oscillator 503, the first local oscillator 503 It takes a certain time (130us~140us) to output the first local oscillator signal stably. Therefore, in this application, the first local oscillator 503 can be activated in advance during the transmission of the second component carrier, that is, at the end of the second time period Before starting, configure the first working parameters of the first local oscillator 503 so that the first local oscillator 503 can be started in advance. Therefore, at the end of the second time period, the first local oscillator 503 has been configured with the first working parameters, and the first local oscillator 503 does not need to wait for 130us to 140us to reach stability, thereby shortening the second time period and the first time period Interruption time between. Exemplarily, using the solution provided in this application, the interruption time between the second time period and the first time period may be 0 us to tens of us.
其中,第一工作参数的生效时间可以配置如下:配置第一工作参数在第一时刻生效,第一时刻与第一时间段的开始时刻的时间差大于或等于第一本振的稳定时间。采用这种配置,可以使得第一本振503在第一时间段的开始时刻能够稳定输出第一本振信号。The effective time of the first working parameter can be configured as follows: the first working parameter is configured to take effect at the first moment, and the time difference between the first moment and the start moment of the first time period is greater than or equal to the stabilization time of the first local oscillator. With this configuration, the first local oscillator 503 can stably output the first local oscillator signal at the beginning of the first time period.
应理解,在第一时间段晚于第二时间段的情况下,第一本振503可以保持常开状态(即一直输出第一本振信号),也可以根据基站配置的上下行配比格式,在需要第一本振503输出第一本振信号时提前至少130us~140us打开。It should be understood that when the first time period is later than the second time period, the first local oscillator 503 can remain normally on (that is, always output the first local oscillator signal), or according to the uplink-downlink ratio format configured by the base station , When the first local oscillator 503 is required to output the first local oscillator signal, it is turned on at least 130us to 140us in advance.
此外,无线通信装置500中的控制器还可以在第一时间段到来之前对第一发射通道501和第二发射通道502中的其他器件的参数进行配置,例如通过发送控制信号对这些器件的参数进行配置,并设定该配置生效的时间为第一时间段的开始时刻之前几us或几十us(即其他器件的稳定时间),经过该几us或几十us的时间后,其他器件均达到稳定状态。具体地,可以对第一发射通道501和第二发射通道502中的发射数字前端(transport digital front  end,TXDFE)、射频模拟前端(radio frequency analog frond end,RFAFE)、RFFE、天线开关中的器件的参数进行配置。In addition, the controller in the wireless communication device 500 can also configure the parameters of other devices in the first transmission channel 501 and the second transmission channel 502 before the arrival of the first time period, for example, by sending a control signal to the parameters of these devices. Perform configuration and set the effective time of the configuration to be a few us or tens of us before the start of the first time period (that is, the stabilization time of other devices). After this time of several us or tens of us, all other devices A stable state is reached. Specifically, the transmission digital front end (TXDFE), radio frequency analog front end (RFAFE), RFFE, and components in the antenna switch in the first transmission channel 501 and the second transmission channel 502 can be To configure the parameters.
二、第一时间段早于第二时间段。2. The first time period is earlier than the second time period.
具体地,在第一时间段早于第二时间段的情况下,该控制器用于控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元在第一时间段的结束时刻由闭合状态变为断开状态,控制第三开关单元在第二时间段的开始时刻由断开状态变为闭合状态。Specifically, when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, the controller is used to control the first switching unit and the second switching unit to change from the closed state to the open state at the end of the first time period, and control The third switch unit changes from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the second time period.
第一时间段早于第二时间段,即先通过第一成员载波在第一发射通道501和第二发射通道502上发送数据,然后通过第二成员载波在第二发射通道502上发送数据,即从第一成员载波切换到第二成员载波。在这种情况下,在第一时间段的结束时刻第一成员载波已发送完毕,因而此时控制器可以控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元在第一时间段的结束时刻由闭合状态变为断开状态,停止第一成员载波的发送;在第二时间段的开始时刻需要开始发送第二成员载波,因而此时控制器可以控制第三开关单元由断开状态变为闭合状态,开始第二成员载波的发送。The first time period is earlier than the second time period, that is, data is sent on the first transmission channel 501 and the second transmission channel 502 through the first component carrier, and then data is sent on the second transmission channel 502 through the second component carrier. That is, switching from the first component carrier to the second component carrier. In this case, the first component carrier has been transmitted at the end of the first time period, so at this time the controller can control the first switching unit and the second switching unit to change from the closed state at the end of the first time period. In the disconnected state, the transmission of the first component carrier is stopped; at the beginning of the second time period, the transmission of the second component carrier needs to be started, so at this time the controller can control the third switch unit from the open state to the closed state, and start Transmission of the second component carrier.
进一步地,控制器还可以在第一时间段的结束时刻到来之前,向第二本振504发送第二控制信号,第二控制信号用于指示第二本振504配置第二工作参数,第二工作参数适用于第二成员载波。Further, the controller may also send a second control signal to the second local oscillator 504 before the end of the first time period arrives. The second control signal is used to instruct the second local oscillator 504 to configure the second operating parameters, The working parameters are applicable to the second component carrier.
具体地,第二工作参数可以用于配置第二本振504输出的本振信号的频率。由于在第二时间段到来之前的时间段,第二本振504可能用于提供与第二本振信号的频率不同的本振信号,因而在切换到第二成员载波之前,需要对第二本振504的工作参数进行配置。Specifically, the second operating parameter may be used to configure the frequency of the local oscillator signal output by the second local oscillator 504. Since the second local oscillator 504 may be used to provide a local oscillator signal with a different frequency from the second local oscillator signal in the time period before the arrival of the second time period, the second local oscillator signal needs to be adjusted before switching to the second component carrier. The operating parameters of the vibration 504 are configured.
关于上述配置第二工作参数的时机可以有如下理解:在从第一成员载波切换到第二成员载波的情况下,由于将第二工作参数配置到第二本振504之后,第二本振504需要一定时间(130us~140us)才能稳定输出第二本振信号,因而在本申请中,可以在第一成员载波的发送过程中提前启动第二本振504,即在第一时间段的结束时刻开始之前即配置第二本振504的第二工作参数,使得第二本振504可以提前启动。因此,在第一时间段的结束时刻,第二本振504已经配置第二工作参数,第二本振504无需再等待130us~140us即可达到稳定,从而缩短第一时间段和第二时间段之间的中断时间。示例性地,采用本申请提供的方案,第一时间段和第二时间段之间的中断时间可以是0us~几十us。Regarding the above-mentioned timing of configuring the second operating parameter, it can be understood as follows: in the case of switching from the first component carrier to the second component carrier, since the second operating parameter is configured to the second local oscillator 504, the second local oscillator 504 It takes a certain time (130us~140us) to output the second local oscillator signal stably. Therefore, in this application, the second local oscillator 504 can be activated in advance during the transmission of the first component carrier, that is, at the end of the first time period Before starting, configure the second working parameters of the second local oscillator 504 so that the second local oscillator 504 can be started in advance. Therefore, at the end of the first time period, the second local oscillator 504 has been configured with the second operating parameters, and the second local oscillator 504 does not need to wait for 130us to 140us to reach stability, thereby shortening the first time period and the second time period Interruption time between. Exemplarily, using the solution provided in this application, the interruption time between the first time period and the second time period may be 0 us to tens of us.
其中,第二工作参数的生效时间可以配置如下:配置第二工作参数在第二时刻生效,第二时刻与第二时间段的开始时刻的时间差大于或等于第二本振的稳定时间。采用这种配置,可以使得第二本振504在第二时间段的开始时刻能够稳定输出第二本振信号。The effective time of the second working parameter can be configured as follows: the second working parameter is configured to take effect at the second time, and the time difference between the second time and the start time of the second time period is greater than or equal to the stabilization time of the second local oscillator. With this configuration, the second local oscillator 504 can stably output the second local oscillator signal at the beginning of the second time period.
应理解,在第一时间段早于第二时间段的情况下,第二本振504可以保持常开状态(即一直输出第二本振信号),也可以根据基站配置的上下行配比格式,在需要第二本振504输出第二本振信号时提前至少130us~140us打开。It should be understood that when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, the second local oscillator 504 can remain normally on (that is, always output the second local oscillator signal), or it can be based on the uplink and downlink ratio format configured by the base station. When the second local oscillator 504 is required to output the second local oscillator signal, it is turned on at least 130 us to 140 us in advance.
此外,无线通信装置500中的控制器还可以在第二时间段到来之前对第二发射通道502中的其他器件的参数进行配置,例如通过发送控制信号对这些器件的参数进行配置,并设定该配置生效的时间为第二时间段的开始时刻之前几us或几十us(即其他器件的稳定时间),经过该几us或几十us的时间后,其他器件均达到稳定状态。具体地,可以对第二发射通道502中的TXDFE、RFAFE、RFFE、天线开关中的器件的参数进行配置。In addition, the controller in the wireless communication device 500 can also configure the parameters of other devices in the second transmission channel 502 before the second time period arrives, for example, by sending a control signal to configure the parameters of these devices, and set The time for the configuration to take effect is several us or tens of us before the start of the second time period (that is, the stabilization time of other devices), and after the time of several us or tens of us, other devices reach a stable state. Specifically, the parameters of the devices in the TXDFE, RFAFE, RFFE, and antenna switch in the second transmission channel 502 can be configured.
示例性地,如图7所示,采用本申请实施例提供的无线通信装置500进行载波切换时, 中断时间(0us~几十us)小于本振的稳定时间(130us~140us),因而采用无线通信装置500可以实现载波之间的快速切换。其中,CC1 2T表示第一成员载波在两个天线上发送,CC21T表示第二成员载波在一个天线上发送。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 7, when the wireless communication device 500 provided by the embodiment of the present application is used to perform carrier switching, the interruption time (0 us ~ tens of us) is less than the stable time of the local oscillator (130 us ~ 140 us), so wireless The communication device 500 can implement fast switching between carriers. Among them, CC1 2T indicates that the first component carrier is transmitted on two antennas, and CC21T indicates that the second component carrier is transmitted on one antenna.
应理解,本申请实施例中的控制器可以是图3所示终端中的基带子系统中的控制器(比如基带处理器)。例如,在图2所示的载波切换流程中,基带子系统在接收到基站发送的载波配置信息以及载波切换请求后,判断终端需要从第一成员载波切换到第二成员载波,此时基带处理器向RFIC中的相关器件(例如本振和开关单元)发送控制信号,配置相关器件的通断和工作参数,相关器件根据基带处理器的指示进行配置后,可以实现载波快速切换。It should be understood that the controller in the embodiment of the present application may be a controller (such as a baseband processor) in the baseband subsystem in the terminal shown in FIG. 3. For example, in the carrier switching process shown in Figure 2, the baseband subsystem determines that the terminal needs to switch from the first component carrier to the second component carrier after receiving the carrier configuration information and the carrier switching request sent by the base station. The device sends control signals to related devices in the RFIC (such as local oscillators and switching units), configures the on-off and working parameters of the related devices, and configures the related devices according to the instructions of the baseband processor to achieve rapid carrier switching.
上述控制器也可以理解为图3所示终端中的RFIC中的控制器(比如RFIC中的数字信号处理器)。例如,在图2所示的载波切换流程中,基带子系统在接收到基站发送的载波配置信息以及载波切换请求后,判断终端需要从第一成员载波切换到第二成员载波,此时基带处理器向RFIC中的数字信号处理器发送控制命令。RFIC中的数字信号处理器在接收到基带处理器发送的控制命令后,基于控制命令适配成相关RF器件的控制命令,并向相关器件发送控制信号,从而配置相关器件的通断和工作参数。相关器件根据RFIC相关RF器件的控制命令进行配置并生效后,可以实现载波快速切换。The above-mentioned controller can also be understood as the controller in the RFIC in the terminal shown in FIG. 3 (for example, the digital signal processor in the RFIC). For example, in the carrier switching process shown in Figure 2, the baseband subsystem determines that the terminal needs to switch from the first component carrier to the second component carrier after receiving the carrier configuration information and the carrier switching request sent by the base station. The device sends control commands to the digital signal processor in the RFIC. After receiving the control command sent by the baseband processor, the digital signal processor in the RFIC adapts it to the control command of the relevant RF device based on the control command, and sends control signals to the relevant device to configure the on-off and working parameters of the relevant device . After the related devices are configured and effective according to the control commands of the RFIC related RF devices, fast carrier switching can be realized.
此外,第一本振503和第二本振504选择性地提供第一本振信号和第二本振信号也可以通过如下方式实现:第三本振通过一个开关单元与第一混频器耦合,第四本振和第五本振通过单刀多掷开关与第二混频器耦合。其中,第三本振和第四本振输出第一本振信号,第五本振输出第二本振信号。In addition, the first local oscillator 503 and the second local oscillator 504 selectively provide the first local oscillator signal and the second local oscillator signal can also be achieved in the following manner: the third local oscillator is coupled to the first mixer through a switch unit , The fourth local oscillator and the fifth local oscillator are coupled with the second mixer through a single-pole multi-throw switch. Among them, the third local oscillator and the fourth local oscillator output the first local oscillator signal, and the fifth local oscillator outputs the second local oscillator signal.
在第一时间段内,该开关单元闭合,第三本振向第一混频器提供第一本振信号;此外,单刀双掷开关选通第四本振,第四本振向第二混频器提供第一本振信号。在第二时间段内,该开关单元断开,第三本振不再向第一混频器提供第一本振信号;此外,单刀双掷开关选通第五本振,第五本振向第二混频器提供第二本振信号。In the first time period, the switch unit is closed, and the third local oscillator provides the first local oscillator signal to the first mixer; in addition, the single-pole double-throw switch gates the fourth local oscillator, and the fourth local oscillator moves to the second mixer. The frequency converter provides the first local oscillator signal. In the second time period, the switch unit is turned off, and the third local oscillator no longer provides the first local oscillator signal to the first mixer; in addition, the single-pole double-throw switch gates the fifth local oscillator, and the fifth local oscillator direction The second mixer provides a second local oscillator signal.
应理解,上述单刀多掷开关仅为实现本振信号择一选通的一种实现方式,上述单刀双掷开关也可以替换为其他用于选通本振信号的器件,比如复用器MUX等。It should be understood that the above-mentioned single-pole multi-throw switch is only an implementation way to realize the selective gating of the local oscillator signal, and the above-mentioned single-pole double-throw switch can also be replaced with other devices for gating the local oscillator signal, such as a multiplexer MUX, etc. .
采用本申请提供的无线通信装置500,可以在第一成员载波和第二成员载波之间快速切换。其中,第一成员载波多天线(双天线)发送,第二成员载波单天线发送。实际应用中,第一成员载波和第二成员载波可以是不同组网方式下的成员载波。下面给出几种第一成员载波和第二成员载波的具体示例。With the wireless communication device 500 provided in the present application, it is possible to quickly switch between the first component carrier and the second component carrier. Among them, the first component carrier multi-antenna (dual antenna) transmission, and the second component carrier single antenna transmission. In practical applications, the first component carrier and the second component carrier may be component carriers in different networking modes. Several specific examples of the first component carrier and the second component carrier are given below.
具体地,第一成员载波可以为NR UL上双天线发送的载波,第二成员载波可以为LTE UL上单天线发送的载波。应用于前述场景二,采用NSA方式、且无SUL时,基站允许终端SUO,第一成员载波可以在NR UL上采用双天线发送,第二成员载波可以在LTE UL上采用单天线发送,此时可采用无线通信装置500进行第一成员载波和第二成员载波之间的快速切换。或者,应用于前述场景二,采用NSA方式、且有SUL时,基站允许终端SUO,此时终端不发送SUL,第一成员载波可以在NR UL上采用双天线发送,第二成员载波可以在LTE UL上采用单天线发送,此时可采用无线通信装置500进行第一成员载波和第二成员载波之间的快速切换。Specifically, the first component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on NR UL, and the second component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by single antenna on LTE UL. Applied to the foregoing scenario two, when NSA mode is used and SUL is not available, the base station allows the terminal SUO, the first component carrier can be transmitted by dual antennas on NR UL, and the second component carrier can be transmitted by single antenna on LTE UL. The wireless communication device 500 may be used to perform fast switching between the first component carrier and the second component carrier. Or, applied to the foregoing scenario two, when the NSA method is used and SUL is available, the base station allows the terminal SUO. At this time, the terminal does not send SUL. The first component carrier can be transmitted by dual antennas on NR UL, and the second component carrier can be transmitted on LTE A single antenna is used for transmission on the UL. In this case, the wireless communication device 500 may be used to perform fast switching between the first component carrier and the second component carrier.
具体地,第一成员载波可以为NR UL上双天线发送的载波,第二成员载波可以为SUL上单天线发送的载波。应用于前述场景二,采用SA方式、且有SUL时,在小区中心或小区边缘,第一成员载波可以在NR UL上采用双天线发送,第二成员载波可以在SUL上采用单天线发送,此时可采用无线通信装置500进行第一成员载波和第二成员载波之间的快速切换。或者,应用于前述场景二,采用NSA方式、且有SUL时,第一成员载波和第二成员载波用于NSA组成的NR节点部分,第一成员载波可以在NR UL上采用双天线发送,第二成员载波可以在SUL上采用单天线发送,此时可采用无线通信装置500进行第一成员载波和第二成员载波之间的快速切换。Specifically, the first component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on NR UL, and the second component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by single antenna on SUL. Applied to the aforementioned scenario two, when the SA method is adopted and SUL is available, at the cell center or cell edge, the first component carrier can be transmitted by dual antennas on NR UL, and the second component carrier can be transmitted by single antenna on SUL. The wireless communication device 500 may be used to perform fast switching between the first component carrier and the second component carrier. Or, applied to the foregoing scenario two, when the NSA method is adopted and SUL is used, the first component carrier and the second component carrier are used for the part of the NR node composed of NSA, and the first component carrier can be transmitted on NR UL using dual antennas. The second component carrier can be transmitted on the SUL by using a single antenna. In this case, the wireless communication device 500 can be used to quickly switch between the first component carrier and the second component carrier.
此外,第一成员载波可以为NR UL上双天线发送的载波,第二成员载波可以为NR UL上单天线发送的载波;或者,第一成员载波可以为LTE UL上双天线发送的载波,第二成员载波可以为LTE UL上单天线发送的载波。其中,第一成员载波和第二成员载波用于隶属相同RAT的DC组网。In addition, the first component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on NR UL, and the second component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by single antenna on NR UL; or the first component carrier may be a carrier transmitted on dual antennas on LTE UL. The second component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by a single antenna on LTE UL. Among them, the first component carrier and the second component carrier are used for DC networking belonging to the same RAT.
需要说明的是,图5所示的无线通信装置500也适用于前述场景一。例如,可以使第二开关单元一直保持断开的状态,第一成员载波在第一发射通道上单天线发送,第二成员载波在第二发射通道上单天线发送,在这种情况下,对第一成员载波和第二成员载波可以实现0us无缝切换。It should be noted that the wireless communication device 500 shown in FIG. 5 is also applicable to the aforementioned scenario 1. For example, the second switch unit can be kept disconnected all the time, the first component carrier is transmitted with a single antenna on the first transmission channel, and the second component carrier is transmitted with a single antenna on the second transmission channel. In this case, The first component carrier and the second component carrier can realize 0us seamless switching.
示例地,图8中示出了本申请实施例提供的一种无线通信装置的结构示意图。该无线通信装置可以视为无线通信装置500的一个具体示例。基带处理器在进行信号处理后将基带信号发送至串行器/解串器(Serdes)后分为两路发射通道。每个发射通道上包含TXDFE、系统时钟、DAC、滤波器、混频器、PA,然后射频信号经过天线开关模块(antenna switch module,ASM)选择后通过天线单元(antenna,ANT)发送出去。此外,该无线通信装置中还包括两个锁相环(PLL0和PLL1),用以为混频器提供本振信号。By way of example, FIG. 8 shows a schematic structural diagram of a wireless communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application. The wireless communication device can be regarded as a specific example of the wireless communication device 500. After the baseband processor performs signal processing, the baseband signal is sent to the serializer/deserializer (Serdes) and then divided into two transmission channels. Each transmitting channel contains TXDFE, system clock, DAC, filter, mixer, PA, and then the radio frequency signal is selected by an antenna switch module (ASM) and then sent out through an antenna unit (ANT). In addition, the wireless communication device also includes two phase-locked loops (PLL0 and PLL1) to provide local oscillator signals for the mixer.
具体地,CC1 1T可以配置在TX1通道;CC2的1T配置在TX0通道,另外1T配置在TX1通道。即CC1通过TX1实现单天线发送,CC2通过TX0和TX1实现双天线发送。Specifically, CC1 1T can be configured on the TX1 channel; CC2 1T can be configured on the TX0 channel, and the other 1T can be configured on the TX1 channel. That is, CC1 implements single antenna transmission through TX1, and CC2 implements dual antenna transmission through TX0 and TX1.
从CC2切换到CC1时,PLL1可以提前启动。TX0和TX1仍旧发送CC2的剩余数据;等PLL1 130us~140us稳定后,CC2的剩余数据发送完毕,断开开关K0和K1,此时可关闭PLL0,闭合开关K2,TX1调整至CC1的发射功率,TX1发送CC1的上行业务数据,TX0则保持低功耗运行状态。When switching from CC2 to CC1, PLL1 can be started early. TX0 and TX1 still send the remaining data of CC2; after the PLL1 130us ~ 140us is stable, the remaining data of CC2 is sent, open switches K0 and K1, at this time, you can close PLL0, close switch K2, and adjust TX1 to the transmit power of CC1. TX1 sends the uplink service data of CC1, and TX0 maintains a low-power operation state.
从CC1切换到CC2时,PLL0可以提前启动。CC1发送完毕TX1的数据后,断开开关K2,此时可关闭PLL1;另外闭合开关K0和K1,TX0和TX1调整至CC2的发射功率,TX0和TX1发送CC2的上行业务信道数据。When switching from CC1 to CC2, PLL0 can be started early. After CC1 sends the data of TX1, open switch K2, and PLL1 can be closed at this time; in addition, close switches K0 and K1, TX0 and TX1 are adjusted to the transmission power of CC2, and TX0 and TX1 send the uplink traffic channel data of CC2.
此外,图8所示的无线通信装置也可以支持CC1单天线发送和CC2单天线发送。例如,开关K1断开,开关K0和K2闭合,CC1通过TX1发送,CC2通过TX0发送。由于CC1和CC2的两个通道互不影响,因而CC1和CC2可以实现0us无缝切换。In addition, the wireless communication device shown in FIG. 8 may also support CC1 single antenna transmission and CC2 single antenna transmission. For example, switch K1 is open, switches K0 and K2 are closed, CC1 is sent through TX1, and CC2 is sent through TX0. Since the two channels of CC1 and CC2 do not affect each other, CC1 and CC2 can achieve 0us seamless switching.
需要说明的是,在图8所示的无线通信装置中,TX0和TX1可以保持常开状态,即已配置采样率、频点、校正参数等工作参数。此外,在该示例中,PLL0和PLL1可以常开,仅通过开关的闭合和断开状态选通TX0和TX1;也可以根据上下行配比格式控制PLL0和PLL1的启动和停止、以及开关的状态,实现非用即关的低功耗处理。It should be noted that in the wireless communication device shown in FIG. 8, TX0 and TX1 can be kept in a normally open state, that is, working parameters such as sampling rate, frequency, and calibration parameters have been configured. In addition, in this example, PLL0 and PLL1 can be normally open, and TX0 and TX1 can be gated only by the closed and open state of the switch; the start and stop of PLL0 and PLL1 and the state of the switch can also be controlled according to the uplink and downlink ratio format , Realize the low-power processing that is off-the-shelf.
综上,采用本申请实施例提供的无线通信装置500,由于第一成员载波在第一时间段内通过第一发射通道501和第二发射通道502发送,因而第一本振503选择性地在第一时间段内为第一混频器和第二混频器提供第一本振信号,可以实现第一混频器和第二混频根据第一本振信号进行混频,从而实现第一成员载波的发送;同样地,由于第二成员载波在第二时间段内通过第二发射通道502发送,因而第二本振504选择性地在第二时间段内为第二混频器提供第二本振信号,可以实现第二混频器根据第二本振信号进行混频,从而实现第二成员载波的发送。In summary, using the wireless communication device 500 provided by the embodiment of the present application, since the first component carrier is transmitted through the first transmission channel 501 and the second transmission channel 502 in the first time period, the first local oscillator 503 is selectively In the first time period, the first local oscillator signal is provided for the first mixer and the second mixer, and the first mixer and the second mixer can be mixed according to the first local oscillator signal, thereby realizing the first Component carrier transmission; similarly, since the second component carrier is transmitted through the second transmission channel 502 in the second time period, the second local oscillator 504 selectively provides the second mixer for the second mixer in the second time period. Two local oscillator signals can realize that the second mixer performs mixing according to the second local oscillator signal, thereby realizing the transmission of the second component carrier.
由于通过第一本振503和第二本振504选择性地提供本振信号,因而在进行载波切换时可以根据第一本振信号的生效时间的需求选择性地使能第一本振503输出第一本振信号,或者根据第二本振信号的生效时间的需求选择性地使能第二本振504输出第二本振信号,从而缩短中断时间。以第一时间段早于第二时间段(即从第一成员载波切换到第二成员载波)为例,在第一时间段内,第一本振503输出第一本振信号;在第一本振503为第一混频器和第二混频器提供第一本振信号的同时(即发送第一成员载波的同时),可以选择性地提前启动第二本振504,但并不将第二本振504的输出提供给第二混频器;在第一成员载波发送完成以后,可以选择性地使能第二本振504生效(即将第二本振504的输出提供给第二混频器),此时第二本振504仅需较短的时间即能达到稳定状态,输出稳定地第二本振信号,从而在第二时间段内在第二成员载波上发送数据。也就是说,第一时间段和第二时间段的间隔时间较短,因而在进行载波切换时的业务中断时间较短,从而减小载波切换对上行数据吞吐量和下行反馈时延的影响。Since the local oscillator signal is selectively provided by the first local oscillator 503 and the second local oscillator 504, the output of the first local oscillator 503 can be selectively enabled according to the requirements of the effective time of the first local oscillator signal during carrier switching. The first local oscillator signal or the second local oscillator 504 is selectively enabled to output the second local oscillator signal according to the requirements of the effective time of the second local oscillator signal, thereby shortening the interruption time. Taking the first time period earlier than the second time period (ie switching from the first component carrier to the second component carrier) as an example, in the first time period, the first local oscillator 503 outputs the first local oscillator signal; While the local oscillator 503 provides the first local oscillator signal for the first mixer and the second mixer (that is, while transmitting the first component carrier), the second local oscillator 504 can be selectively activated in advance, but the The output of the second local oscillator 504 is provided to the second mixer; after the transmission of the first component carrier is completed, the second local oscillator 504 can be selectively enabled (that is, the output of the second local oscillator 504 is provided to the second mixer). Frequency converter), at this time, the second local oscillator 504 can reach a stable state in a short time, and output a stable second local oscillator signal, so as to send data on the second component carrier in the second time period. That is to say, the interval between the first time period and the second time period is short, so the service interruption time during carrier switching is short, thereby reducing the impact of carrier switching on uplink data throughput and downlink feedback delay.
参见图9,为本申请实施例提供的另一种无线通信装置。该无线通信装置900包括多个发射通道,多个发射通道中的第一发射通道901用于在第一时间段内在第一成员载波上发送数据,还用于在第二时间段内在第二成员载波上发送数据;多个发射通道中的第二发射通道902用于在第一时间段内在第一成员载波上发送数据,还用于在第二时间段内在第二成员载波上发送数据。Referring to FIG. 9, another wireless communication device provided by an embodiment of this application. The wireless communication device 900 includes multiple transmission channels. The first transmission channel 901 of the multiple transmission channels is used to transmit data on a first component carrier in a first time period, and is also used to transmit data to a second member carrier in a second time period. Data is sent on the carrier; the second transmission channel 902 of the multiple transmission channels is used to send data on the first component carrier in the first time period, and is also used to send data on the second component carrier in the second time period.
第一本振903,用于选择性地在第一时间段内为第一发射通道901中的第一混频器以及第二发射通道902中的第二混频器提供第一本振信号。The first local oscillator 903 is used to selectively provide the first local oscillator signal for the first mixer in the first transmission channel 901 and the second mixer in the second transmission channel 902 in the first time period.
第二本振904,用于选择性地在第二时间段内为第一混频器和第二混频器提供第二本振信号。The second local oscillator 904 is used to selectively provide a second local oscillator signal for the first mixer and the second mixer in the second time period.
其中,多个发射通道、第一本振903和第二本振904可以集成在第一集成电路芯片中,例如可以集成在RFIC中。Among them, the multiple transmitting channels, the first local oscillator 903 and the second local oscillator 904 may be integrated in the first integrated circuit chip, for example, may be integrated in the RFIC.
不难看出,在无线通信装置900中,第一成员载波采用多天线(双天线)发送,第二成员载波采用多天线(双天线)发送。即,在第一时间段,第一成员载波在第一发射通道901和第二发射通道902上发送;在第二时间段,第二成员载波在第一发射通道901和第二发射通道902上发送。也就是说,图9所示的无线通信装置900适用于前述场景三下的载波切换。在该场景下,第一发射通道901和第二发射通道902都是时分复用的。其中,第一时间段可以晚于第二时间段,也可以早于第二时间段。It is not difficult to see that in the wireless communication device 900, the first component carrier is transmitted using multiple antennas (dual antennas), and the second component carrier is transmitted using multiple antennas (dual antennas). That is, in the first time period, the first component carrier is transmitted on the first transmission channel 901 and the second transmission channel 902; in the second time period, the second component carrier is transmitted on the first transmission channel 901 and the second transmission channel 902 send. In other words, the wireless communication device 900 shown in FIG. 9 is suitable for carrier switching in the third scenario described above. In this scenario, both the first transmission channel 901 and the second transmission channel 902 are time division multiplexed. Among them, the first time period may be later than the second time period or may be earlier than the second time period.
需要说明的是,前述关于无线通信装置500的四点说明对无线通信装置900同样适用,此处不再赘述。It should be noted that the foregoing four descriptions about the wireless communication device 500 are also applicable to the wireless communication device 900, and will not be repeated here.
具体地,第一本振903和第二本振904选择性地提供第一本振信号和第二本振信号可 以通过如下方式实现:第一本振903通过第一开关单元与第一混频器耦合、通过第二开关单元与第二混频器耦合;第二本振904通过第三开关单元与第二混频器耦合、通过第四开关单元与第一混频器耦合;在第一时间段内,第一开关单元和第二开关单元处于闭合状态,第三开关单元和第四开关单元处于断开状态;在第二时间段内,第一开关单元和第二开关单元处于断开状态,第三开关单元和第四开关单元处于闭合状态。具体地,该无线通信装置900可以如图10所示。Specifically, the first local oscillator 903 and the second local oscillator 904 selectively provide the first local oscillator signal and the second local oscillator signal in the following manner: the first local oscillator 903 is mixed with the first local oscillator through the first switch unit The second local oscillator 904 is coupled to the second mixer through the third switch unit, and is coupled to the first mixer through the fourth switch unit; in the first During the time period, the first switch unit and the second switch unit are in the closed state, and the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit are in the open state; in the second time period, the first switch unit and the second switch unit are in the open state State, the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit are in a closed state. Specifically, the wireless communication device 900 may be as shown in FIG. 10.
采用上述方案,可以通过第一开关单元、第二开关单元、第三开关单元和第四开关单元的切换来实现选择性地为第一混频器提供第一本振信号和第二本振信号,以及为第二混频器提供第一本振信号和第二本振信号。With the above solution, the first switch unit, the second switch unit, the third switch unit, and the fourth switch unit can be switched to selectively provide the first local oscillator signal and the second local oscillator signal to the first mixer. , And provide the first local oscillator signal and the second local oscillator signal for the second mixer.
在第一时间段内,第一发射通道901和第二发射通道902在第一成员载波上发送数据,此时可以将第一开关单元和第二开关单元闭合、将第三开关单元和第四开关单元断开,因而第一本振903与第一混频器和第二混频器均耦合,第一本振903输出的第一本振信号可以提供给第一混频器和第二混频器;同时,由于第三开关单元和第四开关单元断开,因而第二本振信号并未提供给第一混频器和第二混频器,第二本振信号不会对第一发射通道901和第二发射通道902上第一成员载波的发送产生影响。In the first time period, the first transmission channel 901 and the second transmission channel 902 transmit data on the first component carrier. At this time, the first switch unit and the second switch unit can be closed, and the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit can be closed. The switch unit is disconnected, so the first local oscillator 903 is coupled with the first mixer and the second mixer. The first local oscillator signal output by the first local oscillator 903 can be provided to the first mixer and the second mixer. At the same time, because the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit are disconnected, the second local oscillator signal is not provided to the first mixer and the second mixer, and the second local oscillator signal will not affect the first The transmission of the first component carrier on the transmission channel 901 and the second transmission channel 902 has an impact.
在第二时间段内,第一发射通道901和第二发射通道902在第二成员载波上发送数据,此时可以将第一开关单元和第二开关单元断开、将第三开关单元和第四开关单元闭合,因而第二本振904与第一混频器和第二混频器耦合,第二本振904输出的第二本振信号可以提供给第一混频器和第二混频器;同时,由于第一开关单元和第二开关单元断开,因而第一本振信号并未提供给第一混频器和第二混频器,第一本振信号不会对第一发射通道901和第二发射通道902上第二成员载波的发送产生影响。In the second time period, the first transmission channel 901 and the second transmission channel 902 send data on the second component carrier. At this time, the first switch unit and the second switch unit can be disconnected, and the third switch unit and the second switch unit can be disconnected. The four-switch unit is closed, so the second local oscillator 904 is coupled with the first mixer and the second mixer, and the second local oscillator signal output by the second local oscillator 904 can be provided to the first mixer and the second mixer At the same time, because the first switch unit and the second switch unit are disconnected, the first local oscillator signal is not provided to the first mixer and the second mixer, and the first local oscillator signal will not be transmitted to the first The transmission of the second component carrier on the channel 901 and the second transmission channel 902 has an impact.
此外,无线通信装置900中还可以包括控制器,该控制器可以根据业务需求对上述第一开关单元、第二开关单元、第三开关单元和第四开关单元的通断进行控制。In addition, the wireless communication device 900 may further include a controller, which can control the on-off of the first switch unit, the second switch unit, the third switch unit, and the fourth switch unit according to service requirements.
控制器的控制逻辑与第一时间段和第二时间段的时间顺序相关,下面分别介绍第一时间段晚于第二时间段以及第一时间段早于第二时间段这两种情况下控制器具体执行的操作。The control logic of the controller is related to the time sequence of the first time period and the second time period. The following describes the control when the first time period is later than the second time period and the first time period is earlier than the second time period. Specific operations performed by the device.
一、第一时间段晚于第二时间段。1. The first time period is later than the second time period.
具体地,在第一时间段晚于第二时间段的情况下,该控制器用于控制第三开关单元和第四开关单元在第二时间段的结束时刻从闭合状态变为断开状态,控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元在第一时间段的开始时刻从断开状态变为闭合状态。Specifically, when the first time period is later than the second time period, the controller is used to control the third switching unit and the fourth switching unit to change from the closed state to the open state at the end of the second time period, and control The first switch unit and the second switch unit change from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the first time period.
第一时间段晚于第二时间段,即从第二成员载波切换到第一成员载波。在这种情况下,在第二时间段的结束时刻第二成员载波已发送完毕,因而此时控制器可以控制第三开关单元和第四开关单元从闭合状态变为断开状态,停止第二成员载波的发送;在第一时间段的开始时刻需要开始发送第一成员载波,因而此时控制器可以控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元从断开状态变为闭合状态,开始第一成员载波的发送。The first time period is later than the second time period, that is, switching from the second component carrier to the first component carrier. In this case, at the end of the second time period, the second component carrier has been transmitted, so at this time the controller can control the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit from the closed state to the open state, and stop the second component carrier. Component carrier transmission; the first component carrier needs to be sent at the beginning of the first time period, so at this time the controller can control the first switching unit and the second switching unit from the open state to the closed state to start the first member Carrier transmission.
进一步地,控制器还可以在第二时间段的结束时刻到来之前,向第一本振903发送第一控制信号,第一控制信号用于指示第一本振903配置第一工作参数,第一工作参数适用于第一成员载波。Further, the controller may also send a first control signal to the first local oscillator 903 before the end of the second time period arrives. The first control signal is used to instruct the first local oscillator 903 to configure the first working parameter, The working parameters are applicable to the first component carrier.
具体地,第一工作参数可以用于配置第一本振903输出的本振信号的频率。由于在第 一时间段到来之前的时间段,第一本振903可能用于提供与第一本振信号的频率不同的本振信号,因而在切换到第一成员载波之前,需要对第一本振903的工作参数进行配置。Specifically, the first working parameter may be used to configure the frequency of the local oscillator signal output by the first local oscillator 903. Because in the time period before the arrival of the first time period, the first local oscillator 903 may be used to provide a local oscillator signal with a frequency different from that of the first local oscillator signal. Therefore, before switching to the first component carrier, the first local oscillator 903 The working parameters of the vibration 903 are configured.
关于上述配置第一工作参数的时机可以有如下理解:在从第二成员载波切换到第一成员载波的情况下,由于将第一工作参数配置到第一本振903之后,第一本振903需要一定时间(130us~140us)才能稳定输出第一本振信号,因而在本申请中,可以在第二成员载波的发送过程中提前启动第一本振903,即在第二时间段的结束时刻开始之前即配置第一本振903的第一工作参数,使得第一本振903可以提前启动。因此,在第二时间段的结束时刻,第一本振903已经配置第一工作参数,第一本振903无需再等待130us~140us即可达到稳定,从而缩短第二时间段和第一时间段之间的中断时间。示例性地,采用本申请提供的方案,第二时间段和第一时间段之间的中断时间可以是0us~几十us。Regarding the above-mentioned timing of configuring the first operating parameter, it can be understood as follows: in the case of switching from the second component carrier to the first component carrier, since the first operating parameter is configured to the first local oscillator 903, the first local oscillator 903 It takes a certain time (130us~140us) to output the first local oscillator signal stably. Therefore, in this application, the first local oscillator 903 can be activated in advance during the transmission of the second component carrier, that is, at the end of the second time period Before starting, configure the first working parameters of the first local oscillator 903 so that the first local oscillator 903 can be started in advance. Therefore, at the end of the second time period, the first local oscillator 903 has been configured with the first working parameters, and the first local oscillator 903 does not need to wait for 130us to 140us to reach stability, thereby shortening the second time period and the first time period Interruption time between. Exemplarily, using the solution provided in this application, the interruption time between the second time period and the first time period may be 0 us to tens of us.
其中,第一工作参数的生效时间可以配置如下:配置第一工作参数在第一时刻生效,第一时刻与第一时间段的开始时刻的时间差大于或等于第一本振的稳定时间。采用这种配置,可以使得第一本振903在第一时间段的开始时刻能够稳定输出第一本振信号。The effective time of the first working parameter can be configured as follows: the first working parameter is configured to take effect at the first moment, and the time difference between the first moment and the start moment of the first time period is greater than or equal to the stabilization time of the first local oscillator. With this configuration, the first local oscillator 903 can stably output the first local oscillator signal at the beginning of the first time period.
此外,无线通信装置900中的控制器还可以在第一时间段到来之前对第一发射通道901和第二发射通道902中的其他器件的参数进行配置,例如通过发送控制信号对这些器件的参数进行配置,并设定该配置生效的时间为第一时间段的开始时刻之前几us或几十us(即其他器件的稳定时间),经过该几us或几十us的时间后,其他器件均达到稳定状态。具体地,可以对第一发射通道901和第二发射通道902中的TXDFE、RFAFE、RFFE、天线开关中的器件的参数进行配置。In addition, the controller in the wireless communication device 900 can also configure the parameters of other devices in the first transmission channel 901 and the second transmission channel 902 before the arrival of the first time period, for example, by sending a control signal to the parameters of these devices. Perform configuration and set the effective time of the configuration to be a few us or tens of us before the start of the first time period (that is, the stabilization time of other devices). After this time of several us or tens of us, all other devices A stable state is reached. Specifically, the parameters of the devices in the TXDFE, RFAFE, RFFE, and antenna switches in the first transmission channel 901 and the second transmission channel 902 can be configured.
二、第一时间段早于第二时间段。2. The first time period is earlier than the second time period.
具体地,在第一时间段早于第二时间段的情况下,该控制器用于控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元在第一时间段的结束时刻由闭合状态变为断开状态,控制第三开关单元和第四开关单元在第二时间段的开始时刻由断开状态变为闭合状态。Specifically, when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, the controller is used to control the first switching unit and the second switching unit to change from the closed state to the open state at the end of the first time period, and control The third switch unit and the fourth switch unit change from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the second time period.
第一时间段早于第二时间段,即从第一成员载波切换到第二成员载波。在这种情况下,在第一时间段的结束时刻第一成员载波已发送完毕,因而此时控制器可以控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元在第一时间段的结束时刻由闭合状态变为断开状态,停止第一成员载波的发送;在第二时间段的开始时刻需要开始发送第二成员载波,因而此时控制器可以控制第三开关单元和第四开关单元由断开状态变为闭合状态,开始第二成员载波的发送。The first time period is earlier than the second time period, that is, switching from the first component carrier to the second component carrier. In this case, the first component carrier has been transmitted at the end of the first time period, so at this time the controller can control the first switching unit and the second switching unit to change from the closed state at the end of the first time period. In the disconnected state, the transmission of the first component carrier is stopped; at the beginning of the second time period, the second component carrier needs to be transmitted, so at this time the controller can control the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit to change from the disconnected state. In the closed state, the transmission of the second component carrier is started.
进一步地,控制器还可以在第一时间段的结束时刻到来之前,向第二本振904发送第二控制信号,第二控制信号用于指示第二本振904配置第二工作参数,第二工作参数适用于第二成员载波。Further, the controller may also send a second control signal to the second local oscillator 904 before the end of the first time period arrives. The second control signal is used to instruct the second local oscillator 904 to configure the second working parameters. The working parameters are applicable to the second component carrier.
具体地,第二工作参数可以用于配置第二本振904输出的本振信号的频率。由于在第二时间段到来之前的时间段,第二本振904可能用于提供与第二本振信号的频率不同的本振信号,因而在切换到第二成员载波之前,需要对第二本振904的工作参数进行配置。Specifically, the second operating parameter may be used to configure the frequency of the local oscillator signal output by the second local oscillator 904. Since the second local oscillator 904 may be used to provide a local oscillator signal with a frequency different from that of the second local oscillator signal in the time period before the arrival of the second time period, the second local oscillator signal needs to be checked before switching to the second component carrier. The operating parameters of the vibration 904 are configured.
关于上述配置第二工作参数的时机可以有如下理解:在从第一成员载波切换到第二成员载波的情况下,由于将第二工作参数配置到第二本振904之后,第二本振904需要一定时间(130us~140us)才能稳定输出第二本振信号,因而在本申请中,可以在第一成员载波的发送过程中提前启动第二本振904,即在第一时间段的结束时刻开始之前即配置第二本振904的第二工作参数,使得第二本振904可以提前启动。因此,在第一时间段的结束时刻,第二本振904已经配置第二工作参数,第二本振904无需再等待130us~140us即可达 到稳定,从而缩短第一时间段和第二时间段之间的中断时间。示例性地,采用本申请提供的方案,第一时间段和第二时间段之间的中断时间可以是0us~几十us。Regarding the above-mentioned timing of configuring the second operating parameter, it can be understood as follows: in the case of switching from the first component carrier to the second component carrier, since the second operating parameter is configured to the second local oscillator 904, the second local oscillator 904 It takes a certain time (130us~140us) to output the second local oscillator signal stably. Therefore, in this application, the second local oscillator 904 can be activated in advance during the transmission of the first component carrier, that is, at the end of the first time period Before starting, configure the second working parameters of the second local oscillator 904 so that the second local oscillator 904 can be started in advance. Therefore, at the end of the first time period, the second local oscillator 904 has been configured with the second working parameters, and the second local oscillator 904 does not need to wait for 130us to 140us to reach stability, thereby shortening the first time period and the second time period Interruption time between. Exemplarily, using the solution provided in this application, the interruption time between the first time period and the second time period may be 0 us to tens of us.
其中,第二工作参数的生效时间可以配置如下:配置第二工作参数在第二时刻生效,第二时刻与第二时间段的开始时刻的时间差大于或等于第二本振的稳定时间。采用这种配置,可以使得第二本振904在第二时间段的开始时刻能够稳定输出第二本振信号。The effective time of the second working parameter can be configured as follows: the second working parameter is configured to take effect at the second time, and the time difference between the second time and the start time of the second time period is greater than or equal to the stabilization time of the second local oscillator. With this configuration, the second local oscillator 904 can stably output the second local oscillator signal at the beginning of the second time period.
此外,无线通信装置900中的控制器还可以在第二时间段到来之前对第二发射通道902中的其他器件的参数进行配置,例如通过发送控制信号对这些器件的参数进行配置,并设定该配置生效的时间为第二时间段的开始时刻之前几us或几十us(即其他器件的稳定时间),经过该几us或几十us的时间后,其他器件均达到稳定状态。具体地,可以对第二发射通道902中的TXDFE、RFAFE、RFFE、天线开关中的器件的参数进行配置。In addition, the controller in the wireless communication device 900 can also configure the parameters of other devices in the second transmission channel 902 before the second time period arrives, for example, by sending control signals to configure the parameters of these devices, and set The time for the configuration to take effect is several us or tens of us before the start of the second time period (that is, the stabilization time of other devices), and after the time of several us or tens of us, other devices reach a stable state. Specifically, the parameters of the devices in the TXDFE, RFAFE, RFFE, and antenna switch in the second transmission channel 902 can be configured.
应理解,与无线通信装置500类似,在无线通信装置900中,第一本振903和第二本振904可以保持常开状态,也可以根据基站配置的上下行配比格式,在需要输出本振信号时提前至少130us~140us打开,此处不再赘述。此外,无线通信装置900中的控制器的具体形态可以参照无线通信装置500中的相关描述,此处不再赘述。It should be understood that, similar to the wireless communication device 500, in the wireless communication device 900, the first local oscillator 903 and the second local oscillator 904 can be kept in a normally on state, or they can be output according to the uplink and downlink ratio format configured by the base station. When the vibration signal is turned on at least 130us to 140us in advance, it will not be repeated here. In addition, for the specific form of the controller in the wireless communication device 900, reference may be made to the relevant description in the wireless communication device 500, which will not be repeated here.
此外,第一本振903和第二本振904选择性地提供第一本振信号和第二本振信号也可以通过如下方式实现:第三本振和第四本振通过单刀多掷开关1与第一混频器耦合,第五本振和第六本振通过单刀多掷开关2与第二混频器耦合。其中,第三本振和第五本振输出第一本振信号,第四本振和第六本振输出第二本振信号。In addition, the selective provision of the first local oscillator signal and the second local oscillator signal by the first local oscillator 903 and the second local oscillator 904 can also be achieved in the following manner: the third local oscillator and the fourth local oscillator pass the single-pole multi-throw switch 1 Coupled with the first mixer, the fifth local oscillator and the sixth local oscillator are coupled with the second mixer through the single-pole multi-throw switch 2. Among them, the third local oscillator and the fifth local oscillator output the first local oscillator signal, and the fourth local oscillator and the sixth local oscillator output the second local oscillator signal.
在第一时间段内,单刀双掷开关1选通第三本振、单刀双掷开关2选通第五本振,第三本振和第五本振分别向第一混频器和第二混频器提供第一本振信号。在第二时间段内,单刀双掷开关1选通第四本振、单刀双掷开关2选通第六本振,第四本振和第六本振分别向第一混频器和第二混频器提供第二本振信号。In the first time period, SPDT switch 1 gated the third local oscillator, SPDT switch 2 gated the fifth local oscillator, and the third local oscillator and the fifth local oscillator were sent to the first mixer and the second local oscillator respectively. The mixer provides the first local oscillator signal. In the second time period, SPDT switch 1 gates the fourth local oscillator, SPDT switch 2 gates the sixth local oscillator, and the fourth local oscillator and the sixth local oscillator are directed to the first mixer and the second The mixer provides the second local oscillator signal.
应理解,上述单刀多掷开关仅为实现本振信号择一选通的一种实现方式,上述单刀双掷开关也可以替换为其他用于选通本振信号的器件,比如复用器MUX等。It should be understood that the above-mentioned single-pole multi-throw switch is only an implementation way to realize the selective gating of the local oscillator signal, and the above-mentioned single-pole double-throw switch can also be replaced with other devices for gating the local oscillator signal, such as a multiplexer MUX, etc. .
采用无线通信装置900,可以在第一成员载波和第二成员载波之间快速切换。其中,第一成员载波多天线(双天线)发送,第二成员载波多天线(双天线)发送。实际应用中,第一成员载波和第二成员载波可以是不同组网方式下的成员载波。下面给出几种第一成员载波和第二成员载波的具体示例。具体地,采用SA方式时,第一成员载波可以在NR UL上采用双天线发送,第二成员载波可以在NR UL上采用双天线发送,此时可采用无线通信装置900进行第一成员载波和第二成员载波之间的快速切换。With the wireless communication device 900, it is possible to quickly switch between the first component carrier and the second component carrier. Among them, the first component carrier multi-antenna (dual antenna) transmission, and the second component carrier multi-antenna (dual antenna) transmission. In practical applications, the first component carrier and the second component carrier may be component carriers in different networking modes. Several specific examples of the first component carrier and the second component carrier are given below. Specifically, when the SA method is adopted, the first component carrier can be transmitted with dual antennas on NR UL, and the second component carrier can be transmitted with dual antennas on NR UL. In this case, the wireless communication device 900 can be used for the first component carrier and Fast handover between second component carriers.
具体地,第一成员载波可以为NR UL上双天线发送的载波,第二成员载波可以为LTE UL上双天线发送的载波。应用于前述场景三,采用NSA方式、且无SUL时,基站允许终端SUO,第一成员载波可以在NR UL上采用双天线发送,第二成员载波可以在LTE UL上采用双天线发送,此时可采用无线通信装置900进行第一成员载波和第二成员载波之间的快速切换。或者,应用于前述场景三,采用NSA方式、且有SUL时,基站允许终端SUO,此时终端不发送SUL,第一成员载波可以在NR UL上采用双天线发送,第二成员载波可以在LTE UL上采用双天线发送,此时可采用无线通信装置900进行第一成员载波和第二成员载波之间的快速切换。Specifically, the first component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on NR UL, and the second component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on LTE UL. Applied to the foregoing scenario 3, when the NSA method is adopted and there is no SUL, the base station allows the terminal SUO, the first component carrier can be transmitted with dual antennas on NR UL, and the second component carrier can be transmitted with dual antennas on LTE UL. In this case The wireless communication device 900 may be used to perform fast switching between the first component carrier and the second component carrier. Or, applied to the foregoing scenario 3, when the NSA method is used and SUL is available, the base station allows the terminal SUO. At this time, the terminal does not send SUL. The first component carrier can be transmitted on NR UL using dual antennas, and the second component carrier can be transmitted on LTE Dual-antenna transmission is used on the UL. In this case, the wireless communication device 900 can be used to quickly switch between the first component carrier and the second component carrier.
此外,第一成员载波可以为NR UL上双天线发送的载波,第二成员载波可以为NR UL上双天线发送的载波;或者,第一成员载波可以为LTE UL上双天线发送的载波,第二成员载波可以为LTE UL上双天线发送的载波。其中,第一成员载波和第二成员载波用于隶属相同RAT的DC组网。In addition, the first component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on NR UL, and the second component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on NR UL; or, the first component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on LTE UL. The second component carrier may be a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on LTE UL. Among them, the first component carrier and the second component carrier are used for DC networking belonging to the same RAT.
需要说明的是,图9所示的无线通信装置900也适用于前述场景一。例如,可以使第二开关单元和第四开关单元一直保持断开的状态,第一成员载波在第一发射通道上单天线发送,第二成员载波在第二发射通道上单天线发送,在这种情况下,对第一成员载波和第二成员载波可以实现0us无缝切换。It should be noted that the wireless communication device 900 shown in FIG. 9 is also applicable to the foregoing scenario 1. For example, the second switch unit and the fourth switch unit can be kept disconnected all the time, the first component carrier is transmitted with a single antenna on the first transmission channel, and the second component carrier is transmitted with a single antenna on the second transmission channel. In this case, 0us seamless switching can be realized for the first component carrier and the second component carrier.
示例地,图11中示出了本申请实施例提供的一种无线通信装置的结构示意图。该无线通信装置可以视为无线通信装置900的一个具体示例。Illustratively, FIG. 11 shows a schematic structural diagram of a wireless communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application. The wireless communication device can be regarded as a specific example of the wireless communication device 900.
基带处理器在进行信号处理后将基带信号发送至串行器/解串器(Serdes)后分为两路发射通道。每个发射通道上包含TXDFE、系统时钟、DAC、滤波器、混频器、PA,然后射频信号经过ASM选择后通过ANT发送出去。此外,该无线通信装置中还包括两个锁相环(PLL0和PLL1),用以为混频器提供本振信号。其中,PLL0关联到TX0和TX1,通过开关K0和K1选通;PLL1关联到TX0和TX1,通过开关K2和K3选通。CC2配置在PLL0;CC1配置在PLL1。After the baseband processor performs signal processing, the baseband signal is sent to the serializer/deserializer (Serdes) and then divided into two transmission channels. Each transmitting channel contains TXDFE, system clock, DAC, filter, mixer, PA, and then the radio frequency signal is selected by ASM and sent out through ANT. In addition, the wireless communication device also includes two phase-locked loops (PLL0 and PLL1) to provide local oscillator signals for the mixer. Among them, PLL0 is connected to TX0 and TX1 and is gated through switches K0 and K1; PLL1 is connected to TX0 and TX1 and is gated through switches K2 and K3. CC2 is configured in PLL0; CC1 is configured in PLL1.
具体地,CC1的1T可以配置在TX0通道,另外1T可以配置在TX1通道;CC2的1T可以配置在TX0通道,另外1T可以配置在TX1通道。即CC1通过TX1和TX2实现双天线发送,CC2通过TX0和TX1实现双天线发送。Specifically, the 1T of CC1 can be configured on the TX0 channel, and the other 1T can be configured on the TX1 channel; the 1T of CC2 can be configured on the TX0 channel, and the other 1T can be configured on the TX1 channel. That is, CC1 realizes dual-antenna transmission through TX1 and TX2, and CC2 realizes dual-antenna transmission through TX0 and TX1.
从CC2切换到CC1时,PLL1可以提前启动。TX0和TX1仍旧发送CC2的剩余数据;等PLL1 130us~140us稳定后,CC2的剩余数据发送完毕,断开开关K0和K1,此时可以关闭PLL0,闭合开关K2和K3,将TX0和TX1调整至CC1的发射功率,TX0和TX1发送CC1的上行业务数据。When switching from CC2 to CC1, PLL1 can be started early. TX0 and TX1 still send the remaining data of CC2; after PLL1 130us ~ 140us is stable, the remaining data of CC2 is sent, open switches K0 and K1, at this time, you can close PLL0, close switches K2 and K3, and adjust TX0 and TX1 to The transmit power of CC1, TX0 and TX1 transmit the uplink service data of CC1.
从CC1切换到CC2时,PLL0可以提前启动。CC1发送完毕TX0和TX1的数据后,断开开关K2和K3,此时可以关闭PLL1;同时,闭合开关K0和K1,将TX0和TX1调整至CC2的发射功率,TX0和TX1发送CC2的上行业务信道数据。When switching from CC1 to CC2, PLL0 can be started early. After CC1 sends the data of TX0 and TX1, open switches K2 and K3, and PLL1 can be closed at this time; at the same time, close switches K0 and K1, adjust TX0 and TX1 to the transmission power of CC2, TX0 and TX1 send CC2's uplink business Channel data.
此外,图11所示的无线通信装置也可以支持CC1单天线发送和CC2单天线发送。例如,开关K1和K3断开,开关K0和K2闭合,CC1通过TX1发送,CC2通过TX0发送。由于CC1和CC2的两个通道互不影响,因而CC1和CC2可以实现0us无缝切换。In addition, the wireless communication device shown in FIG. 11 may also support CC1 single antenna transmission and CC2 single antenna transmission. For example, switches K1 and K3 are open, switches K0 and K2 are closed, CC1 is sent through TX1, and CC2 is sent through TX0. Since the two channels of CC1 and CC2 do not affect each other, CC1 and CC2 can achieve 0us seamless switching.
综上,采用无线通信装置900,由于第一成员载波在第一时间段内通过第一发射通道901和第二发射通道902发送,因而第一本振903选择性地在第一时间段内为第一混频器和第二混频器提供第一本振信号,可以实现第一混频器和第二混频根据第一本振信号进行混频,从而实现第一成员载波的发送;同样地,由于第二成员载波在第二时间段内通过第一发射通道901和第二发射通道902发送,因而第二本振904选择性地在第二时间段内为第一混频器和第二混频器提供第二本振信号,可以实现第一混频器和第二混频根据第二本振信号进行混频,从而实现第一成员载波的发送。In summary, using the wireless communication device 900, since the first component carrier is transmitted through the first transmission channel 901 and the second transmission channel 902 in the first time period, the first local oscillator 903 is selectively used in the first time period. The first mixer and the second mixer provide the first local oscillator signal, and the first mixer and the second mixer can be mixed according to the first local oscillator signal, so as to realize the transmission of the first component carrier; In particular, since the second component carrier is transmitted through the first transmission channel 901 and the second transmission channel 902 in the second time period, the second local oscillator 904 is selectively used as the first mixer and the second transmitter in the second time period. The second mixer provides the second local oscillator signal, so that the first mixer and the second mixer can mix according to the second local oscillator signal, thereby realizing the transmission of the first component carrier.
由于通过第一本振903和第二本振904选择性地提供本振信号,因而在进行载波切换时可以根据第一本振信号的生效时间的需求选择性地使能第一本振903输出第一本振信号, 或者根据第二本振信号的生效时间的需求选择性地使能第二本振904输出第二本振信号,从而缩短中断时间。以第一时间段早于第二时间段(即从第一成员载波切换到第二成员载波)为例,在第一时间段内,第一本振903输出第一本振信号;在第一本振903为第一混频器和第二混频器提供第一本振信号的同时(即发送第一成员载波的同时),可以选择性地提前启动第二本振904,但并不将第二本振904的输出提供给第二混频器;在第一成员载波发送完成以后,可以选择性地使能第二本振904生效(即将第二本振904的输出提供给第二混频器),此时由于第二本振904已提前启动,因而仅需较短的时间即能达到稳定状态,稳定地输出第二本振信号,从而在第二时间段内在第二成员载波上发送数据。由于第一时间段和第二时间段的间隔时间较短,因而在进行载波切换时的业务中断时间较短,从而减小载波切换对上行数据吞吐量和下行反馈时延的影响。Since the local oscillator signal is selectively provided by the first local oscillator 903 and the second local oscillator 904, the output of the first local oscillator 903 can be selectively enabled according to the requirements of the effective time of the first local oscillator signal during carrier switching. The first local oscillator signal or the second local oscillator 904 is selectively enabled to output the second local oscillator signal according to the requirements of the effective time of the second local oscillator signal, thereby shortening the interruption time. Taking the first time period earlier than the second time period (ie switching from the first component carrier to the second component carrier) as an example, in the first time period, the first local oscillator 903 outputs the first local oscillator signal; While the local oscillator 903 provides the first local oscillator signal for the first mixer and the second mixer (that is, while transmitting the first component carrier), the second local oscillator 904 can be selectively activated in advance, but the The output of the second local oscillator 904 is provided to the second mixer; after the transmission of the first component carrier is completed, the second local oscillator 904 can be selectively enabled (that is, the output of the second local oscillator 904 is provided to the second mixer). Frequency converter). At this time, since the second local oscillator 904 has been activated in advance, it only takes a short time to reach a stable state, and output the second local oscillator signal stably, so as to be on the second component carrier in the second time period. send data. Since the interval between the first time period and the second time period is short, the service interruption time during carrier switching is short, thereby reducing the influence of carrier switching on uplink data throughput and downlink feedback delay.
基于同一发明构思,本申请实施例还提供一种载波切换方法。采用该载波切换方法,可以通过无线通信装置500实现载波快速切换。即,该载波切换方法应用于无线通信装置中,无线通信装置包括:多个发射通道,多个发射通道中的第一发射通道用于在第一时间段内在第一成员载波上发送数据,多个发射通道中的第二发射通道用于在第一时间段内在第一成员载波上发送数据,以及在第二时间段内在第二成员载波上发送数据;第一本振,用于输出第一本振信号;第二本振,用于输出第二本振信号。Based on the same inventive concept, the embodiment of the present application also provides a carrier switching method. By adopting this carrier switching method, the wireless communication device 500 can realize rapid carrier switching. That is, the carrier switching method is applied to a wireless communication device, and the wireless communication device includes: a plurality of transmission channels, the first transmission channel of the plurality of transmission channels is used to transmit data on the first component carrier in the first time period, and The second transmission channel of the two transmission channels is used to send data on the first component carrier in the first time period and to send data on the second component carrier in the second time period; the first local oscillator is used to output the first component carrier. Local oscillator signal; the second local oscillator, used to output the second local oscillator signal.
参见图12,该载波切换方法包括如下步骤。Referring to FIG. 12, the carrier switching method includes the following steps.
S1201:使能第一本振在第一时间段内为第一发射通道中的第一混频器和第二发射通道中的第二混频器提供第一本振信号。S1201: Enable the first local oscillator to provide the first local oscillator signal for the first mixer in the first transmission channel and the second mixer in the second transmission channel in the first time period.
S1202:使能第二本振在第二时间段内为第二混频器提供第二本振信号。S1202: Enable the second local oscillator to provide the second local oscillator signal for the second mixer in the second time period.
具体地,第一本振可以通过第一开关单元与第一混频器耦合、通过第二开关单元与第二混频器耦合;第二本振可以通过第三开关单元与第二混频器耦合;那么,图12所示方法具体包括:在第一时间段内,控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元处于闭合状态,第三开关单元处于断开状态;在第二时间段内,控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元处于断开状态,第三开关单元处于闭合状态。Specifically, the first local oscillator can be coupled with the first mixer through the first switch unit, and coupled with the second mixer through the second switch unit; the second local oscillator can be coupled with the second mixer through the third switch unit. Then, the method shown in FIG. 12 specifically includes: in the first time period, controlling the first switching unit and the second switching unit to be in the closed state, and the third switching unit to be in the off state; in the second time period, controlling The first switch unit and the second switch unit are in an open state, and the third switch unit is in a closed state.
此外,图12所示的方法还包括:在第一时间段晚于第二时间段的情况下,控制第三开关单元在第二时间段的结束时刻从闭合状态变为断开状态,控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元在第一时间段的开始时刻从断开状态变为闭合状态;以及,在第一时间段早于第二时间段的情况下,控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元在第一时间段的结束时刻由闭合状态变为断开状态,控制第三开关单元在第二时间段的开始时刻由断开状态变为闭合状态。In addition, the method shown in FIG. 12 further includes: when the first time period is later than the second time period, controlling the third switch unit to change from the closed state to the open state at the end of the second time period, and controlling the second time period A switch unit and a second switch unit change from an open state to a closed state at the beginning of the first time period; and, when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, control the first switch unit and the second switch unit The switching unit changes from the closed state to the open state at the end of the first time period, and controls the third switch unit to change from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the second time period.
采用上述方案,可以通过第一开关单元、第二开关单元和第三开关单元的切换,实现第一成员载波到第二成员载波的切换,或者实现第二成员载波到第一成员载波的切换。With the above solution, the first component carrier can be switched to the second component carrier, or the second component carrier can be switched to the first component carrier through the switching of the first switch unit, the second switch unit, and the third switch unit.
此外,图12所示的方法还包括:在第一时间段晚于第二时间段的情况下,在第二时间段的结束时刻到来之前,控制第一本振配置第一工作参数,第一工作参数适用于第一成员载波;在第一时间段早于第二时间段的情况下,在第一时间段的结束时刻到来之前,控制第二本振配置第二工作参数,第二工作参数适用于第二成员载波。In addition, the method shown in FIG. 12 further includes: when the first time period is later than the second time period, before the end of the second time period arrives, controlling the first local oscillator to configure the first working parameter, and the first The working parameters are applicable to the first component carrier; if the first time period is earlier than the second time period, before the end of the first time period arrives, the second local oscillator is controlled to configure the second working parameter, the second working parameter Applies to the second component carrier.
在从第二成员载波切换到第一成员载波的情况下,由于将第一工作参数配置到第一本振之后,第一本振需要一定时间(130us~140us)才能稳定输出第一本振信号,因而可以在第二成员载波的发送过程中提前启动第一本振,即在第二时间段的结束时刻开始之前即配 置第一本振的第一工作参数。因此,在第二时间段的结束时刻,第一本振已经配置第一工作参数,第一本振无需再等待130us~140us即可达到稳定,从而缩短第二时间段和第一时间段之间的中断时间。In the case of switching from the second component carrier to the first component carrier, since the first operating parameter is configured to the first local oscillator, the first local oscillator needs a certain time (130us ~ 140us) to stably output the first local oscillator signal Therefore, the first local oscillator can be started in advance in the transmission process of the second component carrier, that is, the first working parameter of the first local oscillator can be configured before the end of the second time period. Therefore, at the end of the second time period, the first local oscillator has been configured with the first working parameters, and the first local oscillator does not need to wait for 130us to 140us to reach stability, thereby shortening the time between the second time period and the first time period The interruption time.
在从第一成员载波切换到第二成员载波的情况下,由于将第二工作参数配置到第二本振之后,第二本振需要一定时间(130us~140us)才能稳定输出第二本振信号,因而可以在第一成员载波的发送过程中提前启动第二本振,即在第一时间段的结束时刻开始之前即配置第二本振的第二工作参数。因此,在第一时间段的结束时刻,第二本振已经配置第二工作参数,第二本振无需再等待130us~140us即可达到稳定,从而缩短第一时间段和第二时间段之间的中断时间。In the case of switching from the first component carrier to the second component carrier, since the second operating parameter is configured to the second local oscillator, the second local oscillator needs a certain time (130us ~ 140us) to stably output the second local oscillator signal Therefore, the second local oscillator can be started in advance during the transmission process of the first component carrier, that is, the second working parameter of the second local oscillator can be configured before the end of the first time period. Therefore, at the end of the first time period, the second local oscillator has been configured with the second operating parameters, and the second local oscillator does not need to wait for 130us to 140us to reach stability, thereby shortening the time between the first time period and the second time period The interruption time.
进一步地,该方法还包括:在第一时间段晚于第二时间段的情况下,配置第一工作参数在第一时刻生效,第一时刻与第一时间段的开始时刻的时间差大于或等于第一本振的稳定时间;在第一时间段早于第二时间段的情况下,配置第二工作参数在第二时刻生效,第二时刻与第二时间段的开始时刻的时间差大于或等于第二本振的稳定时间。Further, the method further includes: when the first time period is later than the second time period, configuring the first working parameter to take effect at the first time, and the time difference between the first time and the start time of the first time period is greater than or equal to The stabilization time of the first local oscillator; when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, configure the second working parameter to take effect at the second time, and the time difference between the second time and the start time of the second time period is greater than or equal to Settling time of the second local oscillator.
具体地,图12所示的方法可以由无线通信装置500中的控制器实现,图12所示方法中未详尽描述的实现方式可以参见无线通信装置500中的相关描述。Specifically, the method shown in FIG. 12 may be implemented by a controller in the wireless communication device 500. For implementations that are not described in detail in the method shown in FIG. 12, reference may be made to related descriptions in the wireless communication device 500.
基于同一发明构思,本申请实施例还提供一种载波切换方法。采用该载波切换方法,可以通过无线通信装置900实现载波快速切换。即,该载波切换方法应用于无线通信装置中,该无线通信装置包括:多个发射通道,多个发射通道中的第一发射通道用于在第一时间段内在第一成员载波上发送数据,以及在第二时间段内在第二成员载波上发送数据;多个发射通道中的第二发射通道用于在第一时间段内在第一成员载波上发送数据,以及在第二时间段内在第二成员载波上发送数据;第一本振,用于输出第一本振信号;第二本振,用于输出第二本振信号。Based on the same inventive concept, the embodiment of the present application also provides a carrier switching method. By adopting this carrier switching method, the wireless communication device 900 can realize rapid carrier switching. That is, the carrier switching method is applied to a wireless communication device, the wireless communication device includes: a plurality of transmission channels, the first transmission channel of the plurality of transmission channels is used to send data on the first component carrier in the first time period, And send data on the second component carrier in the second time period; the second transmission channel of the plurality of transmission channels is used to send data on the first component carrier in the first time period, and in the second time period Data is sent on the component carrier; the first local oscillator is used to output the first local oscillator signal; the second local oscillator is used to output the second local oscillator signal.
参见图13,该载波切换方法包括如下步骤。Referring to FIG. 13, the carrier switching method includes the following steps.
S1301:使能第一本振在第一时间段内为第一发射通道中的第一混频器和第二发射通道中的第二混频器提供第一本振信号。S1301: Enable the first local oscillator to provide the first local oscillator signal for the first mixer in the first transmission channel and the second mixer in the second transmission channel in the first time period.
S1302:使能第二本振在第二时间段内为第一混频器和第二混频器提供第二本振信号。S1302: Enable the second local oscillator to provide the second local oscillator signal for the first mixer and the second mixer in the second time period.
具体地,第一本振可以通过第一开关单元与第一混频器耦合、通过第二开关单元与第二混频器耦合;第二本振可以通过第三开关单元与第二混频器耦合、通过第四开关单元与第一混频器耦合。那么,图13所示方法具体包括:在第一时间段内,控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元处于闭合状态,第三开关单元和第四开关单元处于断开状态;在第二时间段内,控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元处于断开状态,第三开关单元和第四开关单元处于闭合状态。Specifically, the first local oscillator can be coupled with the first mixer through the first switch unit, and coupled with the second mixer through the second switch unit; the second local oscillator can be coupled with the second mixer through the third switch unit. Coupling and coupling with the first mixer through the fourth switch unit. Then, the method shown in FIG. 13 specifically includes: in the first time period, controlling the first switching unit and the second switching unit to be in the closed state, and the third switching unit and the fourth switching unit to be in the off state; in the second time period Inside, the first switch unit and the second switch unit are controlled to be in an off state, and the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit are in a closed state.
此外,图13所示方法还包括:在第一时间段晚于第二时间段的情况下,控制第三开关单元和第四开关单元在第二时间段的结束时刻从闭合状态变为断开状态,控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元在第一时间段的开始时刻从断开状态变为闭合状态;以及,在第一时间段早于第二时间段的情况下,控制第一开关单元和第二开关单元在第一时间段的结束时刻由闭合状态变为断开状态,控制第三开关单元和第四开关单元在第二时间段的开始时刻由断开状态变为闭合状态。In addition, the method shown in FIG. 13 further includes: when the first time period is later than the second time period, controlling the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit to change from the closed state to the open state at the end of the second time period Control the first switch unit and the second switch unit to change from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the first time period; and, when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, control the first switch The unit and the second switch unit change from the closed state to the open state at the end of the first time period, and control the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit to change from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the second time period.
采用上述方案,可以通过第一开关单元、第二开关单元、第三开关单元和第四开关单 元的切换,实现第一成员载波到第二成员载波的切换,或者实现第二成员载波到第一成员载波的切换。With the above solution, the first component carrier can be switched to the second component carrier, or the second component carrier can be switched to the first component carrier through the switching of the first switch unit, the second switch unit, the third switch unit, and the fourth switch unit. Component carrier switching.
此外,图13所示的方法还包括:在第一时间段晚于第二时间段的情况下,在第二时间段的结束时刻到来之前,控制第一本振配置第一工作参数,第一工作参数适用于第一成员载波;在第一时间段早于第二时间段的情况下,在第一时间段的结束时刻到来之前,控制第二本振配置第二工作参数,第二工作参数适用于第二成员载波。In addition, the method shown in FIG. 13 further includes: when the first time period is later than the second time period, before the end of the second time period arrives, controlling the first local oscillator to configure the first working parameter, and the first The working parameters are applicable to the first component carrier; if the first time period is earlier than the second time period, before the end of the first time period arrives, the second local oscillator is controlled to configure the second working parameter, the second working parameter Applies to the second component carrier.
在从第二成员载波切换到第一成员载波的情况下,由于将第一工作参数配置到第一本振之后,第一本振需要一定时间(130us~140us)才能稳定输出第一本振信号,因而可以在第二成员载波的发送过程中提前启动第一本振,即在第二时间段的结束时刻开始之前即配置第一本振的第一工作参数。因此,在第二时间段的结束时刻,第一本振已经配置第一工作参数,第一本振无需再等待130us~140us即可达到稳定,从而缩短第二时间段和第一时间段之间的中断时间。In the case of switching from the second component carrier to the first component carrier, since the first operating parameter is configured to the first local oscillator, the first local oscillator needs a certain time (130us ~ 140us) to stably output the first local oscillator signal Therefore, the first local oscillator can be started in advance in the transmission process of the second component carrier, that is, the first working parameter of the first local oscillator can be configured before the end of the second time period. Therefore, at the end of the second time period, the first local oscillator has been configured with the first working parameters, and the first local oscillator does not need to wait for 130us to 140us to reach stability, thereby shortening the time between the second time period and the first time period The interruption time.
在从第一成员载波切换到第二成员载波的情况下,由于将第二工作参数配置到第二本振之后,第二本振需要一定时间(130us~140us)才能稳定输出第二本振信号,因而可以在第一成员载波的发送过程中提前启动第二本振,即在第一时间段的结束时刻开始之前即配置第二本振的第二工作参数。因此,在第一时间段的结束时刻,第二本振已经配置第二工作参数,第二本振无需再等待130us~140us即可达到稳定,从而缩短第一时间段和第二时间段之间的中断时间。In the case of switching from the first component carrier to the second component carrier, since the second operating parameter is configured to the second local oscillator, the second local oscillator needs a certain time (130us ~ 140us) to stably output the second local oscillator signal Therefore, the second local oscillator can be started in advance during the transmission process of the first component carrier, that is, the second working parameter of the second local oscillator can be configured before the end of the first time period. Therefore, at the end of the first time period, the second local oscillator has been configured with the second working parameters, and the second local oscillator does not need to wait for 130us to 140us to reach stability, thereby shortening the time between the first time period and the second time period The interruption time.
进一步地,该方法还包括:在第一时间段晚于第二时间段的情况下,配置第一工作参数在第一时刻生效,第一时刻与第一时间段的开始时刻的时间差大于或等于第一本振的稳定时间;在第一时间段早于第二时间段的情况下,配置第二工作参数在第二时刻生效,第二时刻与第二时间段的开始时刻的时间差大于或等于第二本振的稳定时间。Further, the method further includes: when the first time period is later than the second time period, configuring the first working parameter to take effect at the first time, and the time difference between the first time and the start time of the first time period is greater than or equal to The stabilization time of the first local oscillator; when the first time period is earlier than the second time period, configure the second working parameter to take effect at the second time, and the time difference between the second time and the start time of the second time period is greater than or equal to Settling time of the second local oscillator.
具体地,图13所示的方法可以由无线通信装置900中的控制器实现,图13所示方法中未详尽描述的实现方式可以参见无线通信装置900中的相关描述。Specifically, the method shown in FIG. 13 may be implemented by a controller in the wireless communication device 900, and for implementations that are not described in detail in the method shown in FIG. 13, reference may be made to related descriptions in the wireless communication device 900.
显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请实施例进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请实施例的范围。这样,倘若本申请实施例的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。Obviously, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the embodiments of the present application without departing from the scope of the embodiments of the present application. In this way, if these modifications and variations of the embodiments of this application fall within the scope of the claims of this application and their equivalent technologies, this application is also intended to include these modifications and variations.

Claims (33)

  1. 一种无线通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A wireless communication device, characterized in that it comprises:
    多个发射通道,所述多个发射通道中的第一发射通道用于在第一时间段内在第一成员载波上发送数据,所述多个发射通道中的第二发射通道用于在所述第一时间段内在所述第一成员载波上发送数据,以及在第二时间段内在第二成员载波上发送数据;A plurality of transmission channels, a first transmission channel of the plurality of transmission channels is used to transmit data on a first component carrier in a first time period, and a second transmission channel of the plurality of transmission channels is used for the Sending data on the first component carrier in the first time period, and sending data on the second component carrier in the second time period;
    第一本振,用于选择性地在所述第一时间段内为所述第一发射通道中的第一混频器以及所述第二发射通道中的第二混频器提供第一本振信号;The first local oscillator is used to selectively provide a first local oscillator for the first mixer in the first transmission channel and the second mixer in the second transmission channel during the first time period. Vibration signal
    第二本振,用于选择性地在所述第二时间段内为所述第二混频器提供第二本振信号。The second local oscillator is used to selectively provide a second local oscillator signal for the second mixer in the second time period.
  2. 如权利要求1所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一本振通过第一开关单元与所述第一混频器耦合、通过第二开关单元与所述第二混频器耦合;所述第二本振通过第三开关单元与所述第二混频器耦合;在所述第一时间段内,所述第一开关单元和所述第二开关单元处于闭合状态,所述第三开关单元处于断开状态;在所述第二时间段内,所述第一开关单元和所述第二开关单元处于断开状态,所述第三开关单元处于闭合状态。8. The device of claim 1, wherein the first local oscillator is coupled to the first mixer through a first switch unit, and is coupled to the second mixer through a second switch unit; The second local oscillator is coupled to the second mixer through a third switch unit; in the first time period, the first switch unit and the second switch unit are in a closed state, and the third The switch unit is in an open state; in the second time period, the first switch unit and the second switch unit are in an open state, and the third switch unit is in a closed state.
  3. 如权利要求2所述的装置,其特征在于,还包括:The device of claim 2, further comprising:
    控制器,用于在所述第一时间段晚于所述第二时间段的情况下,控制所述第三开关单元在所述第二时间段的结束时刻从闭合状态变为断开状态,控制所述第一开关单元和所述第二开关单元在所述第一时间段的开始时刻从断开状态变为闭合状态;以及,在所述第一时间段早于所述第二时间段的情况下,控制所述第一开关单元和所述第二开关单元在所述第一时间段的结束时刻由闭合状态变为断开状态,控制所述第三开关单元在所述第二时间段的开始时刻由断开状态变为闭合状态。A controller, configured to control the third switch unit to change from a closed state to an open state at the end of the second time period when the first time period is later than the second time period, Control the first switch unit and the second switch unit to change from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the first time period; and, the first time period is earlier than the second time period In the case of controlling the first switching unit and the second switching unit to change from the closed state to the open state at the end of the first time period, and controlling the third switching unit to operate at the second time The beginning of the segment changes from the open state to the closed state.
  4. 如权利要求3所述的装置,其特征在于,所述控制器还用于:5. The device of claim 3, wherein the controller is further configured to:
    在所述第一时间段晚于所述第二时间段的情况下,在所述第二时间段的结束时刻到来之前,向所述第一本振发送第一控制信号,所述第一控制信号用于指示所述第一本振配置第一工作参数,所述第一工作参数适用于所述第一成员载波;In the case that the first time period is later than the second time period, before the end of the second time period arrives, the first control signal is sent to the first local oscillator, and the first control The signal is used to instruct the first local oscillator to configure a first working parameter, where the first working parameter is applicable to the first component carrier;
    在所述第一时间段早于所述第二时间段的情况下,在所述第一时间段的结束时刻到来之前,向所述第二本振发送第二控制信号,所述第二控制信号用于指示所述第二本振配置第二工作参数,所述第二工作参数适用于所述第二成员载波。In the case that the first time period is earlier than the second time period, before the end of the first time period arrives, a second control signal is sent to the second local oscillator, and the second control The signal is used to instruct the second local oscillator to configure a second working parameter, and the second working parameter is applicable to the second component carrier.
  5. 如权利要求4所述的装置,其特征在于,所述控制器还用于:The device of claim 4, wherein the controller is further configured to:
    在所述第一时间段晚于所述第二时间段的情况下,配置所述第一工作参数在第一时刻生效,所述第一时刻与所述第一时间段的开始时刻的时间差大于或等于所述第一本振的稳定时间;In the case that the first time period is later than the second time period, the configuration of the first working parameter takes effect at the first time, and the time difference between the first time and the start time of the first time period is greater than Or equal to the stabilization time of the first local oscillator;
    在所述第一时间段早于所述第二时间段的情况下,配置所述第二工作参数在第二时刻生效,所述第二时刻与所述第二时间段的开始时刻的时间差大于或等于所述第二本振的稳定时间。In the case that the first time period is earlier than the second time period, the second working parameter is configured to take effect at a second time, and the time difference between the second time and the start time of the second time period is greater than Or equal to the stabilization time of the second local oscillator.
  6. 如权利要求1~5任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一成员载波为新空口上行链路NR UL上双天线发送的载波,所述第二成员载波为长期演进上行链路LTE UL上单天线发送的载波。The apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the first component carrier is a carrier for dual-antenna transmission on a new air interface uplink NR UL, and the second component carrier is a long-term evolution uplink A carrier transmitted by a single antenna on LTE UL.
  7. 如权利要求1~5任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一成员载波为LTE UL上双天线发送的载波,所述第二成员载波为NR UL上单天线发送的载波。The apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the first component carrier is a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on LTE UL, and the second component carrier is a carrier transmitted by single antenna on NR UL.
  8. 如权利要求6或7所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一成员载波和所述第二成员载波用于非独立部署NSA组网。The apparatus according to claim 6 or 7, wherein the first component carrier and the second component carrier are used for non-independent deployment of NSA networking.
  9. 如权利要求1~5任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一成员载波为NR UL上双天线发送的载波,所述第二成员载波为SUL上单天线发送的载波。The apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the first component carrier is a carrier transmitted by two antennas on NR UL, and the second component carrier is a carrier transmitted by a single antenna on SUL.
  10. 如权利要求9所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一成员载波和所述第二成员载波用于NSA组网的NR节点;或者,所述第一成员载波和所述第二成员载波用于独立部署SA组网。The apparatus according to claim 9, wherein the first component carrier and the second component carrier are used for an NR node of an NSA network; or, the first component carrier and the second component carrier Used for independent deployment of SA networking.
  11. 如权利要求1~5任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一成员载波为NR UL上双天线发送的载波,所述第二成员载波为NR UL上单天线发送的载波;或者,所述第一成员载波为LTE UL上双天线发送的载波,所述第二成员载波为LTE UL上单天线发送的载波。The apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the first component carrier is a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on NR UL, and the second component carrier is a carrier transmitted by single antenna on NR UL; Alternatively, the first component carrier is a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on LTE UL, and the second component carrier is a carrier transmitted by single antenna on LTE UL.
  12. 如权利要求11所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一成员载波和所述第二成员载波用于隶属相同无线接入技术RAT的双连接DC组网。The apparatus according to claim 11, wherein the first component carrier and the second component carrier are used in a dual-connection DC networking that belongs to the same radio access technology RAT.
  13. 如权利要求1~12任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述多个发射通道、所述第一本振和所述第二本振集成在第一集成电路芯片中。The device according to any one of claims 1 to 12, wherein the multiple transmitting channels, the first local oscillator and the second local oscillator are integrated in a first integrated circuit chip.
  14. 一种无线通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A wireless communication device, characterized in that it comprises:
    多个发射通道,所述多个发射通道中的第一发射通道用于在第一时间段内在第一成员载波上发送数据,以及在第二时间段内在第二成员载波上发送数据;所述多个发射通道中的第二发射通道用于在所述第一时间段内在所述第一成员载波上发送数据,以及在所述第二时间段内在所述第二成员载波上发送数据;A plurality of transmission channels, a first transmission channel of the plurality of transmission channels is used to send data on a first component carrier in a first time period, and to send data on a second component carrier in a second time period; The second transmission channel of the plurality of transmission channels is used for sending data on the first component carrier in the first time period, and sending data on the second component carrier in the second time period;
    第一本振,用于选择性地在所述第一时间段内为所述第一发射通道中的第一混频器以及所述第二发射通道中的第二混频器提供第一本振信号;The first local oscillator is used to selectively provide a first local oscillator for the first mixer in the first transmission channel and the second mixer in the second transmission channel during the first time period. Vibration signal
    第二本振,用于选择性地在所述第二时间段内为所述第一混频器和所述第二混频器提供第二本振信号。The second local oscillator is used to selectively provide a second local oscillator signal for the first mixer and the second mixer in the second time period.
  15. 如权利要求14所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一本振通过第一开关单元与所述第一混频器耦合、通过第二开关单元与所述第二混频器耦合;所述第二本振通过第三开 关单元与所述第二混频器耦合、通过第四开关单元与所述第一混频器耦合;在所述第一时间段内,所述第一开关单元和所述第二开关单元处于闭合状态,所述第三开关单元和所述第四开关单元处于断开状态;在所述第二时间段内,所述第一开关单元和所述第二开关单元处于断开状态,所述第三开关单元和所述第四开关单元处于闭合状态。The device of claim 14, wherein the first local oscillator is coupled to the first mixer through a first switch unit, and is coupled to the second mixer through a second switch unit; The second local oscillator is coupled to the second mixer through a third switch unit, and is coupled to the first mixer through a fourth switch unit; in the first time period, the first switch unit And the second switch unit are in the closed state, the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit are in the open state; in the second time period, the first switch unit and the second switch The unit is in an open state, and the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit are in a closed state.
  16. 如权利要求15所述的装置,其特征在于,还包括:The apparatus of claim 15, further comprising:
    控制器:用于在所述第一时间段晚于所述第二时间段的情况下,控制所述第三开关单元和所述第四开关单元在所述第二时间段的结束时刻从闭合状态变为断开状态,控制所述第一开关单元和所述第二开关单元在所述第一时间段的开始时刻从断开状态变为闭合状态;以及,在所述第一时间段早于所述第二时间段的情况下,控制所述第一开关单元和所述第二开关单元在所述第一时间段的结束时刻由闭合状态变为断开状态,控制所述第三开关单元和所述第四开关单元在所述第二时间段的开始时刻由断开状态变为闭合状态。Controller: when the first time period is later than the second time period, control the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit to switch from being closed at the end of the second time period The state changes to the open state, and the first switch unit and the second switch unit are controlled to change from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the first time period; and, early in the first time period In the case of the second time period, control the first switch unit and the second switch unit to change from the closed state to the open state at the end of the first time period, and control the third switch The unit and the fourth switch unit change from an open state to a closed state at the beginning of the second time period.
  17. 如权利要求16所述的装置,其特征在于,所述控制器还用于:The device of claim 16, wherein the controller is further configured to:
    在所述第一时间段晚于所述第二时间段的情况下,在所述第二时间段的结束时刻到来之前,向所述第一本振发送第一控制信号,所述第一控制信号用于指示所述第一本振配置第一工作参数,所述第一工作参数适用于所述第一成员载波;In the case that the first time period is later than the second time period, before the end of the second time period arrives, the first control signal is sent to the first local oscillator, and the first control The signal is used to instruct the first local oscillator to configure a first working parameter, where the first working parameter is applicable to the first component carrier;
    在所述第一时间段早于所述第二时间段的情况下,在所述第一时间段的结束时刻到来之前,向所述第二本振发送第二控制信号,所述第二控制信号用于指示所述第二本振配置第二工作参数,所述第二工作参数适用于所述第二成员载波。In the case that the first time period is earlier than the second time period, before the end of the first time period arrives, a second control signal is sent to the second local oscillator, and the second control The signal is used to instruct the second local oscillator to configure a second working parameter, and the second working parameter is applicable to the second component carrier.
  18. 如权利要求17所述的装置,其特征在于,所述控制器还用于:The device of claim 17, wherein the controller is further configured to:
    在所述第一时间段晚于所述第二时间段的情况下,配置所述第一工作参数在第一时刻生效,所述第一时刻与所述第一时间段的开始时刻的时间差大于或等于所述第一本振的稳定时间;In the case that the first time period is later than the second time period, the configuration of the first working parameter takes effect at the first time, and the time difference between the first time and the start time of the first time period is greater than Or equal to the stabilization time of the first local oscillator;
    在所述第一时间段早于所述第二时间段的情况下,配置所述第二工作参数在第二时刻生效,所述第二时刻与所述第二时间段的开始时刻的时间差大于或等于所述第二本振的稳定时间。In the case that the first time period is earlier than the second time period, the second working parameter is configured to take effect at a second time, and the time difference between the second time and the start time of the second time period is greater than Or equal to the stabilization time of the second local oscillator.
  19. 如权利要求14~18任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一成员载波为NR UL上双天线发送的载波,所述第二成员载波为LTE UL上双天线发送的载波。The apparatus according to any one of claims 14 to 18, wherein the first component carrier is a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on NR UL, and the second component carrier is a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on LTE UL.
  20. 如权利要求19所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一成员载波和所述第二成员载波用于非独立部署NSA组网。The apparatus according to claim 19, wherein the first component carrier and the second component carrier are used for non-independent deployment of NSA networking.
  21. 如权利要求14~18任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一成员载波为NR UL上双天线发送的载波,所述第二成员载波为NR UL上双天线发送的载波;或者,所述第一成员载波为LTE UL上双天线发送的载波,所述第二成员载波为LTE UL上双天线发送的载波。The apparatus according to any one of claims 14 to 18, wherein the first component carrier is a carrier transmitted by two antennas on NR UL, and the second component carrier is a carrier transmitted by two antennas on NR UL; Alternatively, the first component carrier is a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on LTE UL, and the second component carrier is a carrier transmitted by dual antennas on LTE UL.
  22. 如权利要求21所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一成员载波和所述第二成员载波用于隶属相同RAT的DC组网。The apparatus according to claim 21, wherein the first component carrier and the second component carrier are used for DC networking belonging to the same RAT.
  23. 如权利要求14~22任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一混频器、所述第二混频器、所述第一本振电路和所述第二本振电路集成在第一集成电路芯片中。The device according to any one of claims 14 to 22, wherein the first mixer, the second mixer, the first local oscillator circuit and the second local oscillator circuit are integrated In the first integrated circuit chip.
  24. 一种载波切换方法,其特征在于,所述方法应用于无线通信装置中,所述无线通信装置包括:多个发射通道,所述多个发射通道中的第一发射通道用于在第一时间段内在第一成员载波上发送数据,所述多个发射通道中的第二发射通道用于在所述第一时间段内在所述第一成员载波上发送数据,以及在第二时间段内在第二成员载波上发送数据;第一本振,用于输出第一本振信号;第二本振,用于输出第二本振信号;A carrier switching method, characterized in that the method is applied to a wireless communication device, the wireless communication device includes: a plurality of transmission channels, and a first transmission channel of the plurality of transmission channels is used for a first time Data is sent on the first component carrier in the first time period, and the second transmission channel of the plurality of transmission channels is used to send data on the first component carrier in the first time period, and in the second time period Two component carriers send data; the first local oscillator is used to output the first local oscillator signal; the second local oscillator is used to output the second local oscillator signal;
    所述方法包括:The method includes:
    使能所述第一本振在所述第一时间段内为所述第一发射通道中的第一混频器和所述第二发射通道中的第二混频器提供所述第一本振信号;The first local oscillator is enabled to provide the first mixer in the first transmission channel and the second mixer in the second transmission channel within the first time period. Vibration signal
    使能所述第二本振在所述第二时间段内为所述第二混频器提供所述第二本振信号。The second local oscillator is enabled to provide the second local oscillator signal for the second mixer in the second time period.
  25. 如权利要求24所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一本振通过第一开关单元与所述第一混频器耦合、通过第二开关单元与所述第二混频器耦合;所述第二本振通过第三开关单元与所述第二混频器耦合;The method of claim 24, wherein the first local oscillator is coupled to the first mixer through a first switch unit, and is coupled to the second mixer through a second switch unit; The second local oscillator is coupled to the second mixer through a third switch unit;
    所述方法具体包括:The method specifically includes:
    在所述第一时间段内,控制所述第一开关单元和所述第二开关单元处于闭合状态,所述第三开关单元处于断开状态;在所述第二时间段内,控制所述第一开关单元和所述第二开关单元处于断开状态,所述第三开关单元处于闭合状态。In the first time period, control the first switch unit and the second switch unit to be in the closed state, and the third switch unit to be in the open state; in the second time period, control the The first switch unit and the second switch unit are in an open state, and the third switch unit is in a closed state.
  26. 如权利要求25所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method of claim 25, further comprising:
    在所述第一时间段晚于所述第二时间段的情况下,控制所述第三开关单元在所述第二时间段的结束时刻从闭合状态变为断开状态,控制所述第一开关单元和所述第二开关单元在所述第一时间段的开始时刻从断开状态变为闭合状态;以及,在所述第一时间段早于所述第二时间段的情况下,控制所述第一开关单元和所述第二开关单元在所述第一时间段的结束时刻由闭合状态变为断开状态,控制所述第三开关单元在所述第二时间段的开始时刻由断开状态变为闭合状态。In the case that the first time period is later than the second time period, control the third switch unit to change from a closed state to an open state at the end of the second time period, and control the first The switch unit and the second switch unit change from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the first time period; and, in the case where the first time period is earlier than the second time period, control The first switch unit and the second switch unit change from the closed state to the open state at the end of the first time period, and control the third switch unit to change from the on state at the beginning of the second time period The open state changes to the closed state.
  27. 如权利要求25或26所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method according to claim 25 or 26, further comprising:
    在所述第一时间段晚于所述第二时间段的情况下,在所述第二时间段的结束时刻到来之前,控制所述第一本振配置第一工作参数,所述第一工作参数适用于所述第一成员载波;In the case that the first time period is later than the second time period, before the end of the second time period arrives, the first local oscillator is controlled to configure the first working parameter, and the first working Parameters are applicable to the first component carrier;
    在所述第一时间段早于所述第二时间段的情况下,在所述第一时间段的结束时刻到来之前,控制所述第二本振配置第二工作参数,所述第二工作参数适用于所述第二成员载波。In the case that the first time period is earlier than the second time period, before the end of the first time period arrives, the second local oscillator is controlled to configure a second working parameter, and the second working time The parameter is applicable to the second component carrier.
  28. 如权利要求27所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method of claim 27, further comprising:
    在所述第一时间段晚于所述第二时间段的情况下,配置所述第一工作参数在第一时刻 生效,所述第一时刻与所述第一时间段的开始时刻的时间差大于或等于所述第一本振的稳定时间;In the case that the first time period is later than the second time period, the configuration of the first working parameter takes effect at the first time, and the time difference between the first time and the start time of the first time period is greater than Or equal to the stabilization time of the first local oscillator;
    在所述第一时间段早于所述第二时间段的情况下,配置所述第二工作参数在第二时刻生效,所述第二时刻与所述第二时间段的开始时刻的时间差大于或等于所述第二本振的稳定时间。In the case that the first time period is earlier than the second time period, the second working parameter is configured to take effect at a second time, and the time difference between the second time and the start time of the second time period is greater than Or equal to the stabilization time of the second local oscillator.
  29. 一种载波切换方法,其特征在于,所述方法应用于无线通信装置中,所述无线通信装置包括:多个发射通道,所述多个发射通道中的第一发射通道用于在第一时间段内在第一成员载波上发送数据,以及在第二时间段内在第二成员载波上发送数据;所述多个发射通道中的第二发射通道用于在所述第一时间段内在所述第一成员载波上发送数据,以及在第二时间段内在第二成员载波上发送数据;第一本振,用于输出第一本振信号;第二本振,用于输出第二本振信号;A carrier switching method, characterized in that the method is applied to a wireless communication device, the wireless communication device includes: a plurality of transmission channels, and a first transmission channel of the plurality of transmission channels is used for a first time Data is sent on the first component carrier in the first time period, and data is sent on the second component carrier in the second time period; the second transmission channel of the plurality of transmission channels is used to transmit data on the second component carrier in the first time period. Send data on a component carrier and send data on a second component carrier in a second time period; a first local oscillator for outputting a first local oscillator signal; a second local oscillator for outputting a second local oscillator signal;
    所述方法包括:The method includes:
    使能所述第一本振在所述第一时间段内为所述第一发射通道中的第一混频器和所述第二发射通道中的第二混频器提供所述第一本振信号;The first local oscillator is enabled to provide the first mixer in the first transmission channel and the second mixer in the second transmission channel within the first time period. Vibration signal
    使能所述第二本振在所述第二时间段内为所述第一混频器和所述第二混频器提供所述第二本振信号。The second local oscillator is enabled to provide the second local oscillator signal to the first mixer and the second mixer in the second time period.
  30. 如权利要求29所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一本振通过第一开关单元与所述第一混频器耦合、通过第二开关单元与所述第二混频器耦合;所述第二本振通过第三开关单元与所述第二混频器耦合、通过所述第四开关单元与所述第一混频器耦合;The method of claim 29, wherein the first local oscillator is coupled with the first mixer through a first switch unit, and is coupled with the second mixer through a second switch unit; The second local oscillator is coupled with the second mixer through a third switch unit, and is coupled with the first mixer through the fourth switch unit;
    所述方法具体包括:The method specifically includes:
    在所述第一时间段内,控制所述第一开关单元和所述第二开关单元处于闭合状态,所述第三开关单元和所述第四开关单元处于断开状态;在所述第二时间段内,控制所述第一开关单元和所述第二开关单元处于断开状态,所述第三开关单元和所述第四开关单元处于闭合状态。In the first time period, control the first switch unit and the second switch unit to be in the closed state, and the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit to be in the open state; in the second During the time period, the first switch unit and the second switch unit are controlled to be in an off state, and the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit are in a closed state.
  31. 如权利要求30所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method of claim 30, further comprising:
    在所述第一时间段晚于所述第二时间段的情况下,控制所述第三开关单元和所述第四开关单元在所述第二时间段的结束时刻从闭合状态变为断开状态,控制所述第一开关单元和所述第二开关单元在所述第一时间段的开始时刻从断开状态变为闭合状态;以及,在所述第一时间段早于所述第二时间段的情况下,控制所述第一开关单元和所述第二开关单元在所述第一时间段的结束时刻由闭合状态变为断开状态,控制所述第三开关单元和所述第四开关单元在所述第二时间段的开始时刻由断开状态变为闭合状态。In the case that the first time period is later than the second time period, control the third switch unit and the fourth switch unit to change from the closed state to the open state at the end of the second time period State, controlling the first switching unit and the second switching unit to change from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the first time period; and, the first time period is earlier than the second In the case of a time period, control the first switch unit and the second switch unit to change from the closed state to the open state at the end of the first time period, and control the third switch unit and the first switch unit The four-switch unit changes from the open state to the closed state at the beginning of the second time period.
  32. 如权利要求30或31所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method according to claim 30 or 31, further comprising:
    在所述第一时间段晚于所述第二时间段的情况下,在所述第二时间段的结束时刻到来之前,控制所述第一本振配置第一工作参数,所述第一工作参数适用于所述第一成员载波;In the case that the first time period is later than the second time period, before the end of the second time period arrives, the first local oscillator is controlled to configure the first working parameter, and the first working Parameters are applicable to the first component carrier;
    在所述第一时间段早于所述第二时间段的情况下,在所述第一时间段的结束时刻到来之前,控制所述第二本振配置第二工作参数,所述第二工作参数适用于所述第二成员载波。In the case that the first time period is earlier than the second time period, before the end of the first time period arrives, the second local oscillator is controlled to configure a second working parameter, and the second working time The parameter is applicable to the second component carrier.
  33. 如权利要求32所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method of claim 32, further comprising:
    在所述第一时间段晚于所述第二时间段的情况下,配置所述第一工作参数在第一时刻生效,所述第一时刻与所述第一时间段的开始时刻的时间差大于或等于所述第一本振的稳定时间;In the case that the first time period is later than the second time period, the configuration of the first working parameter takes effect at the first time, and the time difference between the first time and the start time of the first time period is greater than Or equal to the stabilization time of the first local oscillator;
    在所述第一时间段早于所述第二时间段的情况下,配置所述第二工作参数在第二时刻生效,所述第二时刻与所述第二时间段的开始时刻的时间差大于或等于所述第二本振的稳定时间。In the case that the first time period is earlier than the second time period, the second working parameter is configured to take effect at a second time, and the time difference between the second time and the start time of the second time period is greater than Or equal to the stabilization time of the second local oscillator.
PCT/CN2019/089894 2019-06-03 2019-06-03 Wireless communication apparatus and carrier switching method WO2020243888A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2019/089894 WO2020243888A1 (en) 2019-06-03 2019-06-03 Wireless communication apparatus and carrier switching method
CN201980016997.0A CN112400339A (en) 2019-06-03 2019-06-03 Wireless communication device and carrier switching method

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2019/089894 WO2020243888A1 (en) 2019-06-03 2019-06-03 Wireless communication apparatus and carrier switching method

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020243888A1 true WO2020243888A1 (en) 2020-12-10

Family

ID=73652666

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/089894 WO2020243888A1 (en) 2019-06-03 2019-06-03 Wireless communication apparatus and carrier switching method

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN112400339A (en)
WO (1) WO2020243888A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP4327603A1 (en) * 2021-09-30 2024-02-28 ZTE Corporation Methods and devices for determining uplink control channel

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9107118B2 (en) * 2010-10-21 2015-08-11 Google Technology Holdings LLC Method for signaling a mobile wireless device to switch to a preset carrier in a multi-carrier 4G network
CN106129588A (en) * 2016-06-28 2016-11-16 广东欧珀移动通信有限公司 The carrier aggregation antenna of alien frequencies section and mobile terminal
CN108810944A (en) * 2017-05-04 2018-11-13 华为技术有限公司 Method, the network equipment and the terminal device of up-link carrier switching

Family Cites Families (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN100574126C (en) * 2006-07-10 2009-12-23 联芯科技有限公司 A kind of RF signal receiving and s ending device and method
CN101123325A (en) * 2007-07-27 2008-02-13 深圳华为通信技术有限公司 Multi-frequency band antenna and method for realizing multi-frequency band antenna
CN101355369B (en) * 2007-07-27 2012-08-22 联芯科技有限公司 Transceiver, mobile terminal as well as method for processing transmission and receive
WO2010127504A1 (en) * 2009-05-08 2010-11-11 华为技术有限公司 Method for transmitting carrier waves and user equipments
CN106301359B (en) * 2015-06-26 2019-05-03 深圳市中兴微电子技术有限公司 A kind of local oscillation signal configuration circuit and local oscillation signal configuration method
CN106605445B (en) * 2015-08-20 2019-12-13 华为技术有限公司 Radio remote unit, receiver and base station
US10893571B2 (en) * 2017-11-17 2021-01-12 Qualcomm Incorporated Radio link monitoring based on discontinuous reception mode
CN109617564A (en) * 2018-12-06 2019-04-12 湖南金翎箭信息技术有限公司 A kind of high quality, fast frequency-hopped TDD wireless transceiver system

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9107118B2 (en) * 2010-10-21 2015-08-11 Google Technology Holdings LLC Method for signaling a mobile wireless device to switch to a preset carrier in a multi-carrier 4G network
CN106129588A (en) * 2016-06-28 2016-11-16 广东欧珀移动通信有限公司 The carrier aggregation antenna of alien frequencies section and mobile terminal
CN108810944A (en) * 2017-05-04 2018-11-13 华为技术有限公司 Method, the network equipment and the terminal device of up-link carrier switching

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN112400339A (en) 2021-02-23

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11088749B2 (en) Device and method of using BRRS configuration
US20220052816A1 (en) Sounding Reference Signal Sending Method and Related Apparatus
US20120003999A1 (en) MIMO Communication System
CN112020139B (en) Communication method and device
US11647556B2 (en) Negotiation on bearer type configurations
CN113784339B (en) Communication method and device
US20080293445A1 (en) Radio frequency apparatus
US20220116193A1 (en) Wireless communication method and apparatus, and radio frequency subsystem
CN112839381A (en) 5G NR FR2 beam management enhancements
CN112788788A (en) System and method for fast single DCI and multi-DCI mode switching
US10306550B2 (en) Apparatus, system and method of wireless local area network (WLAN) setting of a user equipment (UE)
EP2717482B1 (en) Radio transceiver
KR102402353B1 (en) Default PUCCH and SRS Beam Determination
WO2020243888A1 (en) Wireless communication apparatus and carrier switching method
WO2021189388A1 (en) Wireless communication device and antenna switching method therefor
CN113098672A (en) Electronic device, method, and storage medium for wireless communication system
WO2022141402A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2022027698A1 (en) Cell handover method and apparatus
WO2023164797A1 (en) Uplink beam indication with unified tci framework
US20220216980A1 (en) Wireless Transceiver Apparatus Integrated with Common Clock Phase-Locked Loop
CN117014020B (en) Communication method and device
WO2024067707A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2022251985A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
CN116528164A (en) Method for determining switching time position and related device
CN117460063A (en) Carrier switching method and device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19931537

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19931537

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1